INSTALLATION AND
OPERATION MANUAL
Egate-100
Channelized Ethernet Gateway
Version 3.0B
The Access Company
Egate-100
Channelized Ethernet Gateway
Version 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Notice
This manual contains information that is proprietary to RAD Data Communications Ltd. ("RAD").
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written
approval by RAD Data Communications.
Right, title and interest, all information, copyrights, patents, know-how, trade secrets and other
intellectual property or other proprietary rights relating to this manual and to the Egate-100 and
any software components contained therein are proprietary products of RAD protected under
international copyright law and shall be and remain solely with RAD.
The Egate-100 product name is owned by RAD. No right, license, or interest to such trademark is
granted hereunder, and you agree that no such right, license, or interest shall be asserted by
you with respect to such trademark. The RAD name, logo, logotype, and the terms EtherAccess,
TDMoIP and TDMoIP Driven, and the product names Optimux and IPmux, are registered
trademarks of RAD Data Communications Ltd. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective holders.
You shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the Manual or the
Egate-100. You are prohibited from, and shall not, directly or indirectly, develop, market,
distribute, license, or sell any product that supports substantially similar functionality as the
Egate-100, based on or derived in any way from the Egate-100. Your undertaking in this
paragraph shall survive the termination of this Agreement.
This Agreement is effective upon your opening of the Egate-100 package and shall continue until
terminated. RAD may terminate this Agreement upon the breach by you of any term hereof.
Upon such termination by RAD, you agree to return to RAD the Egate-100 and all copies and
portions thereof.
For further information contact RAD at the address below or contact your local distributor.
International Headquarters
RAD Data Communications Ltd.
North America Headquarters
RAD Data Communications Inc.
24 Raoul Wallenberg Street
Tel Aviv 69719, Israel
Tel: 972-3-6458181
Fax: 972-3-6498250, 6474436
E-mail: market@rad.com
900 Corporate Drive
Mahwah, NJ 07430, USA
Tel: (201) 5291100, Toll free: 1-800-4447234
Fax: (201) 5295777
E-mail: market@radusa.com
© 2005–2008 RAD Data Communications Ltd.
Publication No. 405-200-03/08
Limited Warranty
RAD warrants to DISTRIBUTOR that the hardware in the Egate-100 to be delivered hereunder
shall be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period
of twelve (12) months following the date of shipment to DISTRIBUTOR.
If, during the warranty period, any component part of the equipment becomes defective by
reason of material or workmanship, and DISTRIBUTOR immediately notifies RAD of such defect,
RAD shall have the option to choose the appropriate corrective action: a) supply a replacement
part, or b) request return of equipment to its plant for repair, or c) perform necessary repair at
the equipment's location. In the event that RAD requests the return of equipment, each party
shall pay one-way shipping costs.
RAD shall be released from all obligations under its warranty in the event that the equipment has
been subjected to misuse, neglect, accident or improper installation, or if repairs or
modifications were made by persons other than RAD's own authorized service personnel, unless
such repairs by others were made with the written consent of RAD.
The above warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied. There are no
warranties which extend beyond the face hereof, including, but not limited to, warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, and in no event shall RAD be liable for
consequential damages.
RAD shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect damages, including, but not
limited to, lost profits from any cause whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the
manufacture, sale, handling, repair, maintenance or use of the Egate-100, and in no event shall
RAD's liability exceed the purchase price of the Egate-100.
DISTRIBUTOR shall be responsible to its customers for any and all warranties which it makes
relating to Egate-100 and for ensuring that replacements and other adjustments required in
connection with the said warranties are satisfactory.
Software components in the Egate-100 are provided "as is" and without warranty of any kind.
RAD disclaims all warranties including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. RAD shall not be liable for any loss of use, interruption of business or
indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of any kind. In spite of the above RAD
shall do its best to provide error-free software products and shall offer free Software updates
during the warranty period under this Agreement.
RAD's cumulative liability to you or any other party for any loss or damages resulting from any
claims, demands, or actions arising out of or relating to this Agreement and the Egate-100 shall
not exceed the sum paid to RAD for the purchase of the Egate-100. In no event shall RAD be
liable for any indirect, incidental, consequential, special, or exemplary damages or lost profits,
even if RAD has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
This Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with the laws of the State of
Israel.
Product Disposal
To facilitate the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of waste
equipment in protecting the environment, the owner of this RAD product is
required to refrain from disposing of this product as unsorted municipal
waste at the end of its life cycle. Upon termination of the unit’s use,
customers should provide for its collection for reuse, recycling or other form
of environmentally conscientious disposal.
General Safety Instructions
The following instructions serve as a general guide for the safe installation and operation of
telecommunications products. Additional instructions, if applicable, are included inside the
manual.
Safety Symbols
This symbol may appear on the equipment or in the text. It indicates potential
safety hazards regarding product operation or maintenance to operator or service
personnel.
Warning
Danger of electric shock! Avoid any contact with the marked surface while the
product is energized or connected to outdoor telecommunication lines.
Protective ground: the marked lug or terminal should be connected to the building
protective ground bus.
Warning
Some products may be equipped with a laser diode. In such cases, a label with the
laser class and other warnings as applicable will be attached near the optical
transmitter. The laser warning symbol may be also attached.
Please observe the following precautions:
•
Before turning on the equipment, make sure that the fiber optic cable is intact
and is connected to the transmitter.
•
Do not attempt to adjust the laser drive current.
•
Do not use broken or unterminated fiber-optic cables/connectors or look
straight at the laser beam.
•
The use of optical devices with the equipment will increase eye hazard.
•
Use of controls, adjustments or performing procedures other than those
specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
ATTENTION: The laser beam may be invisible!
In some cases, the users may insert their own SFP laser transceivers into the product. Users are
alerted that RAD cannot be held responsible for any damage that may result if non-compliant
transceivers are used. In particular, users are warned to use only agency approved products that
comply with the local laser safety regulations for Class 1 laser products.
Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation and maintenance of
this product. Only qualified and authorized service personnel should carry out adjustment,
maintenance or repairs to this product. No installation, adjustment, maintenance or repairs
should be performed by either the operator or the user.
Handling Energized Products
General Safety Practices
Do not touch or tamper with the power supply when the power cord is connected. Line voltages
may be present inside certain products even when the power switch (if installed) is in the OFF
position or a fuse is blown. For DC-powered products, although the voltages levels are usually
not hazardous, energy hazards may still exist.
Before working on equipment connected to power lines or telecommunication lines, remove
jewelry or any other metallic object that may come into contact with energized parts.
Unless otherwise specified, all products are intended to be grounded during normal use.
Grounding is provided by connecting the mains plug to a wall socket with a protective ground
terminal. If a ground lug is provided on the product, it should be connected to the protective
ground at all times, by a wire with a diameter of 18 AWG or wider. Rack-mounted equipment
should be mounted only in grounded racks and cabinets.
Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last. Do not connect
telecommunication cables to ungrounded equipment. Make sure that all other cables are
disconnected before disconnecting the ground.
Connecting AC Mains
Make sure that the electrical installation complies with local codes.
Always connect the AC plug to a wall socket with a protective ground.
The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power
to the product is 16A. The circuit breaker in the building installation should have high breaking
capacity and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A.
Always connect the power cord first to the equipment and then to the wall socket. If a power
switch is provided in the equipment, set it to the OFF position. If the power cord cannot be
readily disconnected in case of emergency, make sure that a readily accessible circuit breaker or
emergency switch is installed in the building installation.
In cases when the power distribution system is IT type, the switch must disconnect both poles
simultaneously.
Connecting DC Power
Unless otherwise specified in the manual, the DC input to the equipment is floating in reference
to the ground. Any single pole can be externally grounded.
Due to the high current capability of DC power systems, care should be taken when connecting
the DC supply to avoid short-circuits and fire hazards.
DC units should be installed in a restricted access area, i.e. an area where access is authorized
only to qualified service and maintenance personnel.
Make sure that the DC power supply is electrically isolated from any AC source and that the
installation complies with the local codes.
The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power
to the product is 16A. The circuit breaker in the building installation should have high breaking
capacity and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A.
Before connecting the DC supply wires, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit. Locate
the circuit breaker of the panel board that services the equipment and switch it to the OFF
position. When connecting the DC supply wires, first connect the ground wire to the
corresponding terminal, then the positive pole and last the negative pole. Switch the circuit
breaker back to the ON position.
A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably rated and approved should be incorporated
in the building installation.
If the DC power supply is floating, the switch must disconnect both poles simultaneously.
Connecting Data and Telecommunications Cables
Data and telecommunication interfaces are classified according to their safety status.
The following table lists the status of several standard interfaces. If the status of a given port
differs from the standard one, a notice will be given in the manual.
Ports
Safety Status
V.11, V.28, V.35, V.36, RS-530, X.21,
10 BaseT, 100 BaseT, Unbalanced E1,
E2, E3, STM, DS-2, DS-3, S-Interface
ISDN, Analog voice E&M
SELV
xDSL (without feeding voltage),
Balanced E1, T1, Sub E1/T1
TNV-1 Telecommunication Network Voltage-1:
Ports whose normal operating voltage is within the
limits of SELV, on which overvoltages from
telecommunications networks are possible.
FXS (Foreign Exchange Subscriber)
TNV-2 Telecommunication Network Voltage-2:
Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the
limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone
ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from
telecommunication networks are not possible. These
ports are not permitted to be directly connected to
external telephone and data lines.
FXO (Foreign Exchange Office), xDSL
(with feeding voltage), U-Interface
ISDN
TNV-3 Telecommunication Network Voltage-3:
Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the
limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone
ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from
telecommunication networks are possible.
Safety Extra Low Voltage:
Ports which do not present a safety hazard. Usually
up to 30 VAC or 60 VDC.
Always connect a given port to a port of the same safety status. If in doubt, seek the assistance
of a qualified safety engineer.
Always make sure that the equipment is grounded before connecting telecommunication cables.
Do not disconnect the ground connection before disconnecting all telecommunications cables.
Some SELV and non-SELV circuits use the same connectors. Use caution when connecting cables.
Extra caution should be exercised during thunderstorms.
When using shielded or coaxial cables, verify that there is a good ground connection at both
ends. The grounding and bonding of the ground connections should comply with the local codes.
The telecommunication wiring in the building may be damaged or present a fire hazard in case of
contact between exposed external wires and the AC power lines. In order to reduce the risk,
there are restrictions on the diameter of wires in the telecom cables, between the equipment
and the mating connectors.
Caution
To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line
cords.
Attention
Pour réduire les risques s’incendie, utiliser seulement des conducteurs de
télécommunications 26 AWG ou de section supérieure.
Some ports are suitable for connection to intra-building or non-exposed wiring or cabling only. In
such cases, a notice will be given in the installation instructions.
Do not attempt to tamper with any carrier-provided equipment or connection hardware.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
The equipment is designed and approved to comply with the electromagnetic regulations of
major regulatory bodies. The following instructions may enhance the performance of the
equipment and will provide better protection against excessive emission and better immunity
against disturbances.
A good ground connection is essential. When installing the equipment in a rack, make sure to
remove all traces of paint from the mounting points. Use suitable lock-washers and torque. If an
external grounding lug is provided, connect it to the ground bus using braided wire as short as
possible.
The equipment is designed to comply with EMC requirements when connecting it with unshielded
twisted pair (UTP) cables. However, the use of shielded wires is always recommended, especially
for high-rate data. In some cases, when unshielded wires are used, ferrite cores should be
installed on certain cables. In such cases, special instructions are provided in the manual.
Disconnect all wires which are not in permanent use, such as cables used for one-time
configuration.
The compliance of the equipment with the regulations for conducted emission on the data lines
is dependent on the cable quality. The emission is tested for UTP with 80 dB longitudinal
conversion loss (LCL).
Unless otherwise specified or described in the manual, TNV-1 and TNV-3 ports provide secondary
protection against surges on the data lines. Primary protectors should be provided in the building
installation.
The equipment is designed to provide adequate protection against electro-static discharge (ESD).
However, it is good working practice to use caution when connecting cables terminated with
plastic connectors (without a grounded metal hood, such as flat cables) to sensitive data lines.
Before connecting such cables, discharge yourself by touching ground or wear an ESD preventive
wrist strap.
FCC-15 User Information
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of the Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the Installation and Operation manual, may cause harmful interference to the
radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
Canadian Emission Requirements
This Class A digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulation.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel
brouilleur du Canada.
Warning per EN 55022 (CISPR-22)
Warning
Avertissement
Achtung
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio
interference, in which case the user will be required to take adequate measures.
Cet appareil est un appareil de Classe A. Dans un environnement résidentiel, cet
appareil peut provoquer des brouillages radioélectriques. Dans ces cas, il peut être
demandé à l’utilisateur de prendre les mesures appropriées.
Das vorliegende Gerät fällt unter die Funkstörgrenzwertklasse A. In Wohngebieten
können beim Betrieb dieses Gerätes Rundfunkströrungen auftreten, für deren
Behebung der Benutzer verantwortlich ist.
Français
Mise au rebut du produit
Afin de faciliter la réutilisation, le recyclage ainsi que d'autres formes de
récupération d'équipement mis au rebut dans le cadre de la protection de
l'environnement, il est demandé au propriétaire de ce produit RAD de ne pas
mettre ce dernier au rebut en tant que déchet municipal non trié, une fois
que le produit est arrivé en fin de cycle de vie. Le client devrait proposer des
solutions de réutilisation, de recyclage ou toute autre forme de mise au rebut
de cette unité dans un esprit de protection de l'environnement, lorsqu'il aura
fini de l'utiliser.
Instructions générales de sécurité
Les instructions suivantes servent de guide général d'installation et d'opération sécurisées des
produits de télécommunications. Des instructions supplémentaires sont éventuellement
indiquées dans le manuel.
Symboles de sécurité
Ce symbole peut apparaitre sur l'équipement ou dans le texte. Il indique des risques
potentiels de sécurité pour l'opérateur ou le personnel de service, quant à
l'opération du produit ou à sa maintenance.
Avertissement
Danger de choc électrique ! Evitez tout contact avec la surface marquée tant que le
produit est sous tension ou connecté à des lignes externes de télécommunications.
Mise à la terre de protection : la cosse ou la borne marquée devrait être connectée
à la prise de terre de protection du bâtiment.
•
Avant la mise en marche de l'équipement, assurez-vous que le câble de fibre
optique est intact et qu'il est connecté au transmetteur.
•
Ne tentez pas d'ajuster le courant de la commande laser.
•
N'utilisez pas des câbles ou connecteurs de fibre optique cassés ou sans
terminaison et n'observez pas directement un rayon laser.
•
L'usage de périphériques optiques avec l'équipement augmentera le risque pour
les yeux.
•
L'usage de contrôles, ajustages ou procédures autres que celles spécifiées ici
pourrait résulter en une dangereuse exposition aux radiations.
ATTENTION : Le rayon laser peut être invisible !
Les utilisateurs pourront, dans certains cas, insérer leurs propres émetteurs-récepteurs Laser SFP
dans le produit. Les utilisateurs sont avertis que RAD ne pourra pas être tenue responsable de
tout dommage pouvant résulter de l'utilisation d'émetteurs-récepteurs non conformes. Plus
particulièrement, les utilisateurs sont avertis de n'utiliser que des produits approuvés par
l'agence et conformes à la réglementation locale de sécurité laser pour les produits laser de
classe 1.
Respectez toujours les précautions standards de sécurité durant l'installation, l'opération et la
maintenance de ce produit. Seul le personnel de service qualifié et autorisé devrait effectuer
l'ajustage, la maintenance ou les réparations de ce produit. Aucune opération d'installation,
d'ajustage, de maintenance ou de réparation ne devrait être effectuée par l'opérateur ou
l'utilisateur.
Manipuler des produits sous tension
Règles générales de sécurité
Ne pas toucher ou altérer l'alimentation en courant lorsque le câble d'alimentation est branché.
Des tensions de lignes peuvent être présentes dans certains produits, même lorsque le
commutateur (s'il est installé) est en position OFF ou si le fusible est rompu. Pour les produits
alimentés par CC, les niveaux de tension ne sont généralement pas dangereux mais des risques
de courant peuvent toujours exister.
Avant de travailler sur un équipement connecté aux lignes de tension ou de télécommunications,
retirez vos bijoux ou tout autre objet métallique pouvant venir en contact avec les pièces sous
tension.
Sauf s'il en est autrement indiqué, tous les produits sont destinés à être mis à la terre durant
l'usage normal. La mise à la terre est fournie par la connexion de la fiche principale à une prise
murale équipée d'une borne protectrice de mise à la terre. Si une cosse de mise à la terre est
fournie avec le produit, elle devrait être connectée à tout moment à une mise à la terre de
protection par un conducteur de diamètre 18 AWG ou plus. L'équipement monté en châssis ne
devrait être monté que sur des châssis et dans des armoires mises à la terre.
Branchez toujours la mise à la terre en premier et débranchez-la en dernier. Ne branchez pas des
câbles de télécommunications à un équipement qui n'est pas mis à la terre. Assurez-vous que
tous les autres câbles sont débranchés avant de déconnecter la mise à la terre.
Français
Certains produits peuvent être équipés d'une diode laser. Dans de tels cas, une
étiquette indiquant la classe laser ainsi que d'autres avertissements, le cas échéant,
sera jointe près du transmetteur optique. Le symbole d'avertissement laser peut
aussi être joint.
Avertissement
Veuillez observer les précautions suivantes :
Français
Connexion au courant du secteur
Assurez-vous que l'installation électrique est conforme à la réglementation locale.
Branchez toujours la fiche de secteur à une prise murale équipée d'une borne protectrice de mise
à la terre.
La capacité maximale permissible en courant du circuit de distribution de la connexion alimentant
le produit est de 16A. Le coupe-circuit dans l'installation du bâtiment devrait avoir une capacité
élevée de rupture et devrait fonctionner sur courant de court-circuit dépassant 35A.
Branchez toujours le câble d'alimentation en premier à l'équipement puis à la prise murale. Si un
commutateur est fourni avec l'équipement, fixez-le en position OFF. Si le câble d'alimentation ne
peut pas être facilement débranché en cas d'urgence, assurez-vous qu'un coupe-circuit ou un
disjoncteur d'urgence facilement accessible est installé dans l'installation du bâtiment.
Le disjoncteur devrait déconnecter simultanément les deux pôles si le système de distribution de
courant est de type IT.
Connexion d'alimentation CC
Sauf s'il en est autrement spécifié dans le manuel, l'entrée CC de l'équipement est flottante par
rapport à la mise à la terre. Tout pôle doit être mis à la terre en externe.
A cause de la capacité de courant des systèmes à alimentation CC, des précautions devraient
être prises lors de la connexion de l'alimentation CC pour éviter des courts-circuits et des risques
d'incendie.
Les unités CC devraient être installées dans une zone à accès restreint, une zone où l'accès n'est
autorisé qu'au personnel qualifié de service et de maintenance.
Assurez-vous que l'alimentation CC est isolée de toute source de courant CA (secteur) et que
l'installation est conforme à la réglementation locale.
La capacité maximale permissible en courant du circuit de distribution de la connexion alimentant
le produit est de 16A. Le coupe-circuit dans l'installation du bâtiment devrait avoir une capacité
élevée de rupture et devrait fonctionner sur courant de court-circuit dépassant 35A.
Avant la connexion des câbles d'alimentation en courant CC, assurez-vous que le circuit CC n'est
pas sous tension. Localisez le coupe-circuit dans le tableau desservant l'équipement et fixez-le
en position OFF. Lors de la connexion de câbles d'alimentation CC, connectez d'abord le
conducteur de mise à la terre à la borne correspondante, puis le pôle positif et en dernier, le
pôle négatif. Remettez le coupe-circuit en position ON.
Un disjoncteur facilement accessible, adapté et approuvé devrait être intégré à l'installation du
bâtiment.
Le disjoncteur devrait déconnecter simultanément les deux pôles si l'alimentation en courant CC
est flottante.
Quick Start Guide
Only an experienced technician should install Egate-100. If you are familiar with
Egate-100, use this quick guide to prepare Egate-100 for operation.
1.
Installing Egate-100
Connecting the Interfaces
³
To connect Egate-100 to the network equipment:
1. Make the following connections, depending on the installed interface:
ƒ
Connect the STM-1/OC-3 equipment to the fiber optic front panel
connectors.
ƒ
Connect the T3 equipment to the T3 front panel connectors.
2. Connect the 1000BaseT or 1000BaseSx LAN to the DATA connector on the
front panel.
3. Use a straight cable to connect the ASCII terminal to the CONTROL connector
on the front panel
or
Connect a Telnet host, a PC running a Web-browsing application, or a
RADview management station to the ETH MNG port.
Connecting the Power
³
To connect Egate-100 to power:
•
Connect the power cable to the power connector on the front panel.
The unit starts running.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installing Egate-100
1
Quick Start Guide
Installation and Operation Manual
2.
Configuring Egate-100
Configure Egate-100 to the desired operation mode via an ASCII terminal connected
to the rear panel CONTROL port. Alternatively, you can manage Egate-100 over
Telnet, a PC running a Web browsing application, or SNMP via the Ethernet or E3
port.
Note
Remote management requires assigning an IP address
Starting a Terminal Session for the First Time
³
To start a terminal configuration session:
1. Connect an ASCII terminal to the CONTROL port on the front panel. The
default settings are as follows:
ƒ
Baud Rate: 115,200 bps
ƒ
Data Bits: 8
ƒ
Parity: None
ƒ
Stop Bits: 1
ƒ
Flow Control: None.
2. To optimize the view of the system menus, do the following:
ƒ
Set the terminal emulator to VT100.
ƒ
If you are using HyperTerminal, set the terminal mode to the 132-column
mode.
3. Power up Egate-100 and verify that the PWR LED on the front panel is on.
4. Verify the unit's correct startup by observing one of the following:
ƒ
From the ASCII terminal verify that the Self-Test was successfully
completed
ƒ
Check the ALM LED on the front panel of the unit:
…
Off – No alarms
…
On – Device alarm.
5. If the ALM LED is on, check the physical connections.
6. Press any key to display the Login screen.
7. Enter the user name and the password and proceed with the management
session.
Note
2
The default user names are su and user. The default password is 1234. Only su
has permission to modify configuration parameters and download new software
versions.
Configuring Egate-100
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Quick Start Guide
Configuring Basic Parameters
The Quick Setup menu allows you to configure mandatory elements. For
additional information on parameters and the menus, refer to Chapter 4.
Configuration via the Quick Setup Menu
³
To configure the required parameters using the Quick Setup menu:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Quick Setup.
The Quick Setup appears as illustrated below.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Quick Setup
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Management
Frame Type
VLAN Mode
Network Setting (Ethernet)
User Setting
>
> (SONET)
> (Aware)
>
>
>
Please select item <1 to 5>
S-Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Quick Setup Menu
2. In the Quick Setup menu, configure the following parameters:
ƒ
Frame Type (SONET or SDH)
ƒ
VLAN Mode (Aware or Unaware).
3. In the Host menu (Quick Setup > Management > Host), configure the
following parameters:
ƒ
IP Address
ƒ
IP Mask
ƒ
Default Gateway
ƒ
Host Tagging (Untagged/Tagged)
4. In the Management Ports menu (Quick Setup > Management > Ports), select
Bind to in order to bind a bridge port to the Host port or ETH-MNG port.
ƒ
To navigate between the bridge ports, press <F> or <B>.
ƒ
To remove the binding to a bridge port, press <R>.
5. In the Network Settings Port menu (Quick Setup > Network Setting > Ports),
select Bind to in order to bind the bridge ports to the Gigabit Ethernet ports
(Gbe-1 and Gbe-2).
ƒ
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
To remove the binding to the bridge port, press <R>.
Configuring Egate-100
3
Quick Start Guide
Installation and Operation Manual
6. In the Quick Setup menu, select User Setting.
The User Setting menu appears.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Quick Setup> User Setting
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Bridge Port Number [1 - 130]
...(3)
Port Name
...(Bridge Port 3)
Protocol Type
> (HDLC)
Physical Port Number[1 - 63]
> (1)
Frame Type
> (Unframed)
Administrative Status
> (Up)
Ingress Filtering
>
(Enabled)
Accept Frame Types
>
(Tag only
Port VID >
... (1)
Default Priority Tag
... (0)
Replace Priority
>
(No)
Egress Tag Handling
>
(None)
Ingress Tag Handling
>
(None)
Loop Detection
>
(Enable)
Link OAM (802.3ah)
>
(Disabled)
Maximum MAC Address[1 - 64000]... (64000)
VLAN ID
... (0)
>
Please select item <1 to 6>
F – Fwd Port; B – Backward Port; R – Remove Port; A – Add Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Quick Setup User Setting Menu
7. For each physical port that you wish to configure and/or bind to a bridge
port, press <A> and configure the following parameters:
4
ƒ
Protocol Type. HDLC, PPP over HDLC for multiple E1/T1, or MLPPP for the
bundle that is bound to the PPP logical port, or GFP single (non-LCAS), or
GFP multi (LCAS) for multiple E1/T1, or VCG for the bundle bound to the
GFP multi logical port
ƒ
Physical Port Number. One of the 63/84 physical E1/T1ports
ƒ
Frame Type. Framing mode, Unframed/CRC-4/no CRC-4 for E1,
Unframed/ESF/D4 for T1
ƒ
Administrative Status. Enabled (Up) or disabled (Down)
ƒ
Ingress Filtering. Enabled or disabled
ƒ
Accept Frame Types. All or Tag only
ƒ
Port VID
ƒ
Default Priority Tag
Configuring Egate-100
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Quick Start Guide
ƒ
Replace Priority Tag. Yes or No.
ƒ
Egress Tag Handling. None, Stripping, Stacking
ƒ
Ingress Tag Handling. None, Stripping, Stacking
ƒ
Loop Detection. Disabled or Enabled
ƒ
Link OAM (802.3ah). Disabled or Enabled
ƒ
Maximum MAC Adress. 1 – 64000
ƒ
VLAN ID.
ƒ
Active Timeslots for framed physical ports only (1-31 or a list of values
for E1, 1-24 for a list of values for T1).
Configuring Egate-100
5
Quick Start Guide
Installation and Operation Manual
Configuration using Standard Menus
This section describes how to configure the required parameters using the full
menu structure.
³
To configure the host parameters:
•
³
³
ƒ
IP Mask
ƒ
Default Gateway.
In the Encapsulation menu (Main > Configuration > System > Management
> Host IP > Encapsulation), configure the following parameters:
ƒ
Host Tagging (untagged/tagged)
ƒ
Host VLAN ID (for tagged only)
ƒ
Host VLAN Priority (for tagged only).
In the Ethernet menu (Main > Configuration > Physical Layer > Ethernet),
press <F> or <B> to select the Gigabit Ethernet port under Port, and then
configure the following parameters:
ƒ
Alarms: Specify whether to mask or unmask the alarms
ƒ
Autonegotiation: Enable or disable autonegotiation mode.
The Autonegotiation option is only available for electrical interfaces, not for
optical interfaces.
To configure STM-1/OC-3 interfaces:
•
³
IP Address
To configure the Ethernet interfaces:
•
Note
ƒ
To configure the host encapsulation:
•
³
In the Host IP menu (Main > Configuration > System > Management
> Host IP), configure the following parameters:
In the SDH/SONET menu (Main > Configuration > Physical Layer
> SDH/SONET), configure the following parameters:
ƒ
Administrative Status: Specify whether the network port is to be used.
ƒ
Tx Clock: Select the source of the system clock: Internal or Loopback
Timing.
ƒ
Alarms: Specify whether to mask or unmask the alarms.
ƒ
E1/T1: Specify the E1/T1 frame mode and port parameters.
To configure channelized T3 interfaces:
1. In the T3 menu (Main > Configuration > Physical Layer > T3), configure the
following parameters:
6
ƒ
Administrative Status: Specify whether the network port is to be used.
ƒ
Tx Clock: Select the source of the system clock: Internal or Loopback
Timing.
Configuring Egate-100
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Quick Start Guide
ƒ
Line Length: Specify long or short T3 line.
ƒ
Alarms: Specify whether to mask or unmask the alarms.
2. Navigate to T1 (Main > Configuration > Physical Layer > T3 > T1) and
configure the mapped T1 channel parameters for each T3 port.
³
To configure logical ports:
•
³
In the Logical Ports menu (Main > Configuration > Logical Layer), define and
configure the required logical ports, including the selection of the protocol
(HDLC, PPP over HDLC, MLPPP, GFP, or VCG).
To configure bridge ports:
1. In the Bridge menu (Main > Configuration > Application > Bridge), configure
the following bridge parameters:
ƒ
VLAN Mode (VLAN-Aware or VLAN-Unaware)
ƒ
Aging Time
ƒ
Split Horizon
ƒ
VLAN Ethertype
ƒ
Loop Detection
ƒ
Static MAC Table
ƒ
Remote Terminal
ƒ
Bridge Ports
ƒ
VLAN Membership (VLAN-Aware bridge only).
2. In the same menu, define the relevant bridge ports.
³
To enable Gigabit Ethernet port redundancy:
•
Note
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
In the Ethernet aggregation menu (Main > Configuration > System >
Protection > Ethernet Aggregation), enable Ethernet Aggregation.
To enable Ethernet aggregation, both Gigabit Ethernet links must be set to Full
Duplex mode at the same line speed, and autonegotiation must be enabled.
Configuring Egate-100
7
Quick Start Guide
8
Configuring Egate-100
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Contents
Chapter 1. Introduction
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Overview.................................................................................................................... 1-1
Product Options...................................................................................................... 1-2
Applications ............................................................................................................ 1-2
Features ................................................................................................................. 1-3
Physical Description ................................................................................................... 1-6
Functional Description................................................................................................ 1-7
Interfaces ............................................................................................................... 1-7
Gigabit Ethernet Link Aggregation ........................................................................... 1-8
Bridge..................................................................................................................... 1-9
Encapsulation ....................................................................................................... 1-15
Timing .................................................................................................................. 1-21
Quality of Service.................................................................................................. 1-21
Buffer Management .............................................................................................. 1-23
Management ........................................................................................................ 1-23
Loop Detection ..................................................................................................... 1-25
Diagnostics ........................................................................................................... 1-25
Statistics Collection............................................................................................... 1-25
Configuration Reset .............................................................................................. 1-26
Technical Specifications............................................................................................ 1-26
Chapter 2. Installation and Setup
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Site Requirements and Prerequisites .......................................................................... 2-1
Package Contents ...................................................................................................... 2-2
Required Equipment ................................................................................................... 2-2
Mounting the Unit ...................................................................................................... 2-3
Installing Fiber Optic SFP Modules .............................................................................. 2-3
Connecting to Channelized T3 Equipment ................................................................... 2-4
Connecting to SDH/SONET Equipment ........................................................................ 2-4
Connecting to Gigabit Ethernet Equipment ................................................................. 2-5
Connecting to Management Stations .......................................................................... 2-5
Connecting to the Terminal ..................................................................................... 2-5
Connecting to the Network Management Station .................................................... 2-6
2.10 Connecting to Power .................................................................................................. 2-6
Connecting to AC Power.......................................................................................... 2-6
Connecting to DC Power ......................................................................................... 2-7
Replacing AC/DC Hot-Swappable Power Supply Unit................................................. 2-7
Chapter 3. Operation
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Turning On the Unit ................................................................................................... 3-1
Indicators .................................................................................................................. 3-1
Default Settings ......................................................................................................... 3-2
Configuration and Management Alternatives .............................................................. 3-5
Working with Terminal ............................................................................................ 3-5
Working with ConfiguRAD ....................................................................................... 3-6
Working with RADview Lite ..................................................................................... 3-8
Overview of Menu Operations .................................................................................... 3-8
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
i
Table of Contents
3.6
Installation and Operation Manual
Main Menu Paths .................................................................................................... 3-9
Principles of Navigation......................................................................................... 3-10
Hot Keys .............................................................................................................. 3-10
Menu Maps ........................................................................................................... 3-12
Turning Off the Unit ................................................................................................. 3-16
Chapter 4. Configuration
4.1
4.2
4.3
Configuring Egate-100 for Management ..................................................................... 4-2
Defining Host Parameters ....................................................................................... 4-2
Configuring Host Encapsulation ............................................................................... 4-4
Entering Device Information .................................................................................... 4-5
Controlling Management Access .............................................................................. 4-6
Configuring User Access .......................................................................................... 4-8
Configuring Network Managers ............................................................................. 4-10
Configuring Radius Server Parameters ................................................................... 4-11
Configuring Terminal Parameters ........................................................................... 4-12
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation........................................................................ 4-13
Setting Device-Level Parameters ........................................................................... 4-13
Setting Physical Layer Parameters ......................................................................... 4-20
Configuring Logical Layer Parameters .................................................................... 4-30
Configuring the Bridge .......................................................................................... 4-35
Configuring the Quality of Service ......................................................................... 4-44
Additional Tasks ....................................................................................................... 4-48
Viewing Inventory ................................................................................................. 4-48
Configuring Date and Time .................................................................................... 4-49
Transferring Software and Configuration Files ....................................................... 4-49
Resetting Egate-100 ............................................................................................. 4-52
Chapter 5. Configuring Typical Applications
5.1
5.2
5.3
Application with User and Management Traffic Separated by VLAN ............................. 5-1
Configuring System Parameters............................................................................... 5-3
Configuring Ethernet Parameters ............................................................................ 5-4
Configuring SDH/SONET Parameters ........................................................................ 5-4
Configuring Logical Layer Parameters ...................................................................... 5-6
Configuring Bridge Parameters ................................................................................ 5-9
Application with IP DSLAM and WiMAX Backhauling over SDH/SONET......................... 5-14
Configuring System Parameters............................................................................. 5-16
Configuring Ethernet Parameters .......................................................................... 5-17
Configuring SDH/SONET Parameters ...................................................................... 5-17
Configuring Logical Layer Parameters .................................................................... 5-19
Configuring Bridge Parameters .............................................................................. 5-21
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1 ............................................. 5-24
Configuring System Parameters............................................................................. 5-26
Configuring Ethernet Parameters .......................................................................... 5-28
Configuring SDH/SONET Parameters ...................................................................... 5-28
Configuring Logical Layer Parameters .................................................................... 5-33
Configuring Bridge Parameters .............................................................................. 5-37
Chapter 6. Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
6.1
ii
Monitoring Performance ............................................................................................. 6-1
Viewing System Status Information ......................................................................... 6-1
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
Table of Contents
Viewing the Clock Sources ....................................................................................... 6-3
Viewing the Connected Managers............................................................................ 6-4
Viewing Link Protection Status ................................................................................ 6-5
Viewing Physical Layer Status .................................................................................. 6-8
Viewing OAM Status .............................................................................................. 6-14
Viewing Bridge Status ........................................................................................... 6-16
Viewing Ethernet Statistics .................................................................................... 6-20
Viewing Logical Layer Statistics ............................................................................. 6-21
Viewing Bridge Statistics ....................................................................................... 6-24
Viewing Radius Statistics ....................................................................................... 6-25
Handling Alarms and Traps ....................................................................................... 6-26
Displaying Events .................................................................................................. 6-30
Clearing Events ..................................................................................................... 6-32
Displaying Alarms.................................................................................................. 6-33
Masking Alarms ..................................................................................................... 6-35
Testing Egate-100.................................................................................................... 6-35
Running Ping Test ................................................................................................. 6-36
Running PRBS Test ................................................................................................ 6-37
Viewing Self Test Results ...................................................................................... 6-37
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 6-39
Technical Support .................................................................................................... 6-40
Appendix A. Connector Wiring
Appendix B. Boot Sequence and Downloading Software
Appendix C. SDH/SONET Mapping
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
iii
Table of Contents
iv
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1
Overview
Egate-100 is a channelized Ethernet gateway, aggregating Ethernet traffic carried
over PDH (E1/T1) into a Gigabit Ethernet MAN (Metropolitan Area Network).
Egate-100 can aggregate up to 42 remote LANs over fractional or up to 16 E1/T1
links using standard encapsulation and bonding protocols.
The unit features next-generation Ethernet over PDH encapsulation and bonding
capabilities with support for standard protocols such as generic framing
procedure (GFP), virtual concatenation (VCAT), and link capacity adjustment
scheme (LCAS). The GFP, VCAT, and LCAS protocols allow service providers to
dynamically allocate bandwidth to their customers. By incorporating these
enhanced capabilities, Egate-100 enables higher user throughput, and offers the
following benefits:
•
Allows users to fully utilize their contracted bandwidth by ensuring low and
constant traffic overhead
•
Minimizes service disruptions in cases of link failures via hitless traffic
restoration
•
Enables high service resiliency for real-time applications by dramatically
reducing delays on the TDM connections
•
Ensures robust traffic delivery with automatic error correction and minimal
packet retransmissions
•
Enhances Ethernet over NG-PDH capabilities by supporting multiple NTUs in
up to 42 remote locations.
Full Layer 2 switching (bridge) between the Ethernet segments beyond the SDH
and Gigabit Ethernet networks is provisioned. The bridge supports VLAN-aware
and VLAN-unaware bridging modes, and can be used for VLAN-based Layer 2
VPNs.
The unit includes two electrical or optical Gigabit Ethernet ports and, depending
on the interface option ordered, either a dual port to the SDH/SONET network or
three channelized T3 ports. The Gigabit Ethernet ports support link aggregation
according to IEEE 802.3ad requirements. The dual SDH/SONET ports support
unidirectional APS or 1+1 optimized bidirectional mode, as per ITU G.841 Annex B.
Telnet and ConfiguRAD (Web-based) for inband configuration and management,
as well as an ASCII terminal for out-of-band management.
The unit is supplied as a compact standalone 1U high enclosure, with an optional
19-inch rack mounting kit.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Overview
1-1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
Product Options
Gigabit Ethernet Port Options
The Gigabit Ethernet port versions are:
•
1000BaseSx, 850nm, LC (SFP) connector
•
1000BaseLx, 1310 nm, LC (SFP) connector
•
10/100/1000BaseT, RJ-45 connector.
Uplink Options
Egate-100 is equipped with two STM-1/OC-3 ports or three channelized T3
interfaces.
STM-1/OC-3 Port Options
The STM-1/OC-3 port versions are:
•
Single mode, 1310 nm short haul per G.957-S1.1, LC (SFP) connector
•
Single mode, 1310 nm long haul per G.957-L1.1, LC (SFP) connector
•
Multi mode, 1310 nm, LC (SFP) connector.
T3 Port Options
Egate-100 has three channelized T3 ports. Each T3 port has 28 T1s mapped to
the T3 interface via M13 multiplexer.
Single/Dual Power Supply
Single or dual power supply versions are available.
Note
A combination of DC and AC power supplies on the same unit is not allowed.
Applications
Figure 1-1 illustrates a typical application, where Egate-100 supports three
remote sites using different user VLANs (CPEs using tag stacking) and an
additional host VLAN shared by the three CPEs for secured management traffic.
See Chapter 5 for information on implementing this application.
1-2
Overview
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Figure 1-1. Typical Egate-100 Application
Features
Egate-100 is an Ethernet concentrator grooming Ethernet traffic carried over PDH
(E1/T1) over SDH into a Gigabit Ethernet LAN.
The unit includes the following interfaces:
•
Two Gigabit Ethernet ports
•
Two STM-1/OC-3c ports or three channelized T3 ports
•
Fast Ethernet port for management
•
Terminal control port for out-of-band management.
Gigabit Ethernet Interface
The two Gigabit Ethernet interfaces operate in full duplex mode, supporting
regular size frames (1600 bytes). The Ethernet ports support flow control as per
IEEE 802.3, including support for pause frames. The ports can act as bridge ports
or be aggregated to provide Gigabit Ethernet link redundancy The Gigabit
Ethernet ports support the following interfaces:
•
1000BaseSx
•
1000BaseLx
•
10/100/1000BaseT with autonegotiation.
Ethernet Link Redundancy
Egate-100 supports Gigabit Ethernet link redundancy based on the link
aggregation protocol IEEE 802.3ad.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Overview
1-3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
STM-1/OC-3 Interface
Egate-100 supports two channelized STM-1/OC-3 interfaces (with APS support)
for SDH mapping (E1s over VC-12 over VC4) or SONET mapping (T1s over VT1.5
over STS1 over STS3). Either one can be configured as the active port.
SDH/SONET mode is user-configurable. Jitter output and tolerance comply with
G.825 requirements.
STM-1/OC-3 APS Support
The option for APS (Automatic Protection Switching) between the two
STM-1/OC-3 ports is available, and can be configured for either unidirectional or
1+1 optimized bidirectional mode, as per ITU G.841 Annex B.
Channelized T3 Interface
The Egate-100 T3 version supports three channelized T3 interfaces. T3 is
supported over a coaxial interface as per T1.107.
28 T1 lines are mapped over each T3 interface using an M13 multiplexing scheme.
The T3 interface supports M23 or C-bit parity framing modes.
Ethernet over E1/T1 Encapsulation
Egate-100 allows you to map up to 63 E1 or 84 T1 channels into the
CH-STM-1/OC-3 interface using the four protocols listed below individually or in
combination:
1-4
•
GFP (G.8040) VCAT (G.7043) LCAS (G.7041): Up to 42 remote sites of
Ethernet over up to 16 E1/T1 links. Egate-100 can work opposite RAD’s
RICi-16 at the remote end to support a complete remote and central site
solution for Ethernet over n x E1/T1.
•
GFP (G.8040): Up to 63/84 remote sites of Ethernet over GFP. Ethernet is
mapped over framed E1/T1. For E1, the GFP frames are mapped into
16-frame multiframe according to G-704. For T1, they are mapped into
24-frame 1544 kbps multiframe.
•
MLPPP: Up to 42 remote sites of Ethernet over n x E1/T1, using MLPPP.
Ethernet can be mapped over up to 8 E1/T1 links. Egate-100 can work
opposite RAD’s RICi-4E1/T1 or RICi-8E1/8T1 at the remote end to support a
complete remote and central site solution for Ethernet over n x E1/T1.
•
PPP/BCP: Up to 126 remote sites of Ethernet over PPP/BCP (FCD-E1 and
FCD-IP compatible). Ethernet can be mapped over unframed E1/T1, or over
fractional E1/T1: n x 64, where n (number of timeslots) = 1–31 for E1 and
1–24 for T1.
•
HDLC: Up to 126 remote sites of Ethernet over RAD HDLC over E1/T1
(RICi-E1/T1, FCD-E1, and FCD-IP compatible). Ethernet can be mapped over
unframed E1/T1, or over fractional E1/T1: n x 64, where n (number of
timeslots) = 1–31 for E1 and 1–24 for T1.
Overview
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Bridge
Egate-100 provides a bridging functionality between its bridge ports:
•
E1/T1 over SDH/SONET (Ethernet over E1/T1 or fractional E1/T1), or T1 over
T3
•
Gigabit Ethernet ports
•
Fast Ethernet management port
•
Internal host.
The internal bridge operates in VLAN-unaware or VLAN-aware modes (with or
without VLAN double tagging).
The VLAN-aware bridge mode allows you to create a subgroup of bridge ports
within the bridge. Each such subgroup is associated with a unique VLAN ID.
Frames can be forwarded only between bridge ports that are members of the
same VLAN, thus enabling a total separation between different VLAN users within
the same bridge.
In VLAN-unaware mode the bridge ignores VLAN tags and forwards frames
according to only their source and destination MAC addresses.
Ethernet OAM
The device provides OAM tools to monitor and troubleshoot an Ethernet network
and quickly detect failures in a single segment (link) according to IEEE 802.3ah for
remote management and remote fault indication, including remote terminal. The
OAM mechanism is useful for monitoring link operation.
The device supports OAM discovery, continuity check, and remote fault indication.
The discovery process enables you to observe the remote device MAC address,
capabilities, and vendor type.
The continuity check issues an alarm when there is no OAM connection with the
remote device. The remote fault indication issues an alarm when it receives one
of the following from the remote device:
•
Link failure
•
Dying gasp
•
Critical event.
Management
You can set up, control, and monitor Egate-100 using one of the following
methods:
•
•
Local and remote management via Gigabit Ethernet port or Fast Ethernet
management port
Local management via an ASCII terminal connected to the V.24 (RS-232) DCE
control port.
ConfiguRAD
ConfiguRAD is a user-friendly Web-based element management system for
remote device configuration and maintenance. It is embedded in Egate-100 and
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Overview
1-5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
provided at no additional cost. ConfiguRAD can be accessed from any standard
Web browser. For additional information, refer to Chapter 3.
Security
The following security protocols are provided by Egate-100 to ensure clientserver communication privacy and correct user authentication:
•
RADIUS (client authentication only)
•
SSLv3 for Web-based management application
•
SSHv2 for Secure Shell communication session
•
SNMPv3 (SNMPv1 is used if SNMPv3 is not enabled).
In addition, management access can be limited to only stations in the Manager
List.
Diagnostic Tools
Egate-100 supports ping tests, E1/T1 PRBS tests, and reviewing self-test results.
For additional information, refer to Chapter 6.
Statistics
The device provides statistics and counter capability for the various physical
interfaces, as well as at the level of logical port and bridge port. For additional
information, refer to Chapter 6.
Alarms
There is an active alarm and log file at the SDH/SONET, T3, Gigabit Ethernet, and
system levels. For additional information, refer to Chapter 6.
1.2
Physical Description
Egate-100 is a 1U high standalone or rack-mountable device. Figure 1-2
illustrates three-dimensional views of Egate-100 with Gigabit Ethernet and
STM-1/OC-3 network interfaces, and Egate-100 with 3xT3 interfaces.
The unit's LEDs, interface, and control connectors (and two hot-swappable
power-supply connectors) are located on the front panel. For additional
information about the unit's LEDs, refer to Chapter 3.
1-6
Physical Description
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Figure 1-2. Egate-100 3D View
1.3
Functional Description
This section describes the major functional features of Egate-100.
Interfaces
STM-1/OC-3 Interface
The SDH/SONET port supports STM-1/OC-3 over optical interface. The optical
interface can be either single-mode short-haul according to G.957 S 1.1, single
mode long haul according to G.957 L 1.1, or multimode according to ANSI T1 646.
Two STM-1/OC-3 ports support APS, to ensure that one is available at all times.
Egate-100 operates in either SDH or SONET mode to support different framing
and mapping parameters.
Two mapping schemes are presented:
•
E1 over STM-1 (SDH path)
•
T1 over OC-3 (SONET path).
STM-1 Mapping
The following figure illustrates the mapping of E1s over SDH.
Figure 1-3. STM-1 / AU-4 / VC-4 / TUG-3s / TUG-2s / TU-12s / VC-12s /E1s
SONET Mapping
The following figure illustrates the mapping of T1s over SONET.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Functional Description
1-7
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 1-4. Low Order: OC-3 / STS-1 SPEs / VT Group / VT1.5s / T1s
Channelized T3 Interface
Three channelized T3 interfaces are provided.
T3 is supported over a coaxial interface as per T1.107.
28 T1 lines are mapped over each T3 interface using an M13 multiplexing scheme.
The T3 interface supports M23 or C-bit parity framing modes.
Gigabit Ethernet Interface
Two Gigabit Ethernet ports are provided. The interface is either an optical
1000BaseSx/Lx or an electrical 10/100/1000BaseT. The interface supports
autonegotiation.
The Gigabit Ethernet interface supports Ethernet and 802.3 standards.
Gigabit Ethernet Link Aggregation
The two Gigabit Ethernet ports can be configured to operate independently as
two separate Ethernet interfaces, or as a single Ethernet interface with link
aggregation mode in accordance with IEEE 802.3ad (without LACP). This mode
inherently provides redundancy: if one of the two Ethernet ports fails, the second
one takes over.
The two Gigabit Ethernet ports use link aggregation in accordance with
IEEE 802.3ad without LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol). In the virtual link
group only one link transmits at a time. If the transmitting link encounters an
error, Egate-100 switches to the redundant link in the group.
With link aggregation, the two Gigabit Ethernet ports serve as a single logical
interface. The two ports must be connected to the same switch/router and set to
the same speed and full duplex autonegotiation must be enabled. Figure 1-5
illustrates link aggregation mode.
Figure 1-5. Link Aggregation Mode
Failure of one of the links is detected by sensing the loss of valid signals at a
port, in which case the traffic is sent through the remaining port.
The equipment connected to the Gigabit Ethernet ports must support and be
configured for link aggregation according to 802.ad with LACP disabled:
•
1-8
Layer 2 switching networks – signal loss
Functional Description
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
As the two Gigabit Ethernet ports serve as a single logical interface, the learning
tables do not change as a result of the interface flip.
The switching time for Gigabit Ethernet optical interfaces is below 50 ms. For
1000BaseT, the switching time is below 1 second, limited by the longer loss of
signal detection for 1000BaseT technology.
Note
For Gigabit Ethernet redundancy to work properly when 802.3ad is enabled, both
Gigabit Ethernet ports must be set to full duplex mode at the same line speed,
and autonegotiation must be enabled.
Bridge
Egate-100 has a multiport bridge with up to two Ethernet bridge ports and up to
130 bridge ports over the CH-STM-1/OC-3 interface. The bridge supports two
modes of operation: VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware.
VLAN-Aware Mode
This mode enables creation of subgroups of bridge ports within the bridge. Each
subgroup is defined per VLAN and is associated with a unique VLAN ID. Frames
with a specific VLAN ID can be forwarded only between bridge ports that are
members of the same VLAN, thus enabling a total separation between different
VLAN users within the same bridge.
The bridge features in VLAN-aware mode are:
•
Full VLAN-aware bridge as per 802.1Q
•
VLAN tag options:
ƒ
Option for VLAN tag stacking (“double VLAN”) at bridge port ingress
ƒ
Option for VLAN tag stacking (“double VLAN”) at bridge port egress
ƒ
Option to copy/set VLAN priority tag at port ingress
ƒ
Option for VLAN tag stripping at port egress
ƒ
Option for VLAN tag stripping at bridge port ingress.
•
Learning and forwarding according to MAC address and VID
•
Learning of up to 64,000 MAC table entries (MAC-VID pairs)
•
Up to 1024 VLANs supported (out of the full VLAN range)
•
MAC learning limit – can be configured for each bridge port
•
Aging time – can be configured at the bridge level
•
MAC table viewing (learned MACs)
•
Optional loop detection
•
Ethernet OAM (802.3ah).
The mechanism of the VLAN-aware bridge can be described as five different
processes:
•
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Ingress – checks each frame entering the bridge to decide if and how this
frame should be passed on to the forwarding process
Functional Description
1-9
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
•
Learning – learns new MAC table entries (MAC only or MAC-VID pairs)
•
Aging – checks the forwarding MAC table periodically
•
Forwarding – decides to which bridge port/ports to forward the frame
•
Egress – selects the format of the transmitted frame at the output port, with
or without VLAN.
Ingress Process
The ingress process is composed of three subprocesses: frame admission, ingress
filtering and PVID assignment to untagged/priority only tagged frames.
•
•
Frame admission – has two modes of operation (configurable per bridge):
ƒ
Admit all frames – all frames arriving from the port are admitted and
proceed to the Ingress Filtering process.
ƒ
Admit only VLAN-tagged frames – only VLAN-tagged frames are admitted
and allowed to proceed to the ingress filtering process. Untagged or
priority-only tagged frames are discarded.
Ingress filtering – configured per bridge, to one of the following modes:
ƒ
Enabled – perform ingress filtering according to VID. This means that only
frames that share a VID assigned to this bridge port are admitted
ƒ
Disabled – all frames are forwarded.
Only admitted frames that pass filtering are submitted to the learning and
forwarding processes. Table 1-1 summarizes the behavior of the ingress
process.
Table 1-1. Ingress Process
Frame Admission
Mode
Ingress Filtering Mode
Bridge Behavior
Admit all frames
Enabled
VLAN-tagged frames with a VLAN ID (or PVID for
untagged/priority tagged frames) that do not include
the bridge port in their VLAN member set are dropped
Disabled
All frames pass.
Enabled
VLAN-tagged frames with a VLAN ID that do not
include the bridge port in their member set are
dropped. Untagged/priority-tagged frames are
dropped.
Disabled
All VLAN-tagged frames pass.
Untagged/priority-tagged frames are dropped.
Admit VLAN-tagged
frames
•
PVID assignment – configurable per bridge port:
ƒ
1-10
In VLAN-aware mode, each received frame entering the bridge is
associated with a single VID. In cases where the received frame does not
contain a VLAN ID (i.e., untagged or priority-only tagged frames), a
specific PVID is assigned to the frame before it passes to the forwarding
process. This means that the untagged/priority tagged frames that have
passed the admission are tagged with PVID and proceed to the ingress
Functional Description
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
filtering process. Tagged frames are double-tagged with the PVID only if
tag stacking is enabled.
•
Default priority tag – configurable per bridge port:
ƒ
•
Replace priority – configurable per bridge port:
ƒ
•
When stacking is disabled in VLAN-aware mode, each received frame that
enters the bridge is tagged with VLAN ID and priority. The original priority
can be replaced with the default priority tag when this parameter is set
to Yes.
Copy origin priority – configurable per bridge port:
ƒ
•
In VLAN-aware mode, each received frame entering the bridge is
associated with a single VLAN ID and priority. In cases where the received
frame does not contain a VLAN ID (i.e., untagged frames), a specific PVID
and default priority tag are assigned to the frame before it passes to the
forwarding process. If tag stacking is enabled, the user can select the
priority according to the received priority tag or the default priority tag.
When stacking is enabled in VLAN-aware mode, each received frame that
enters the bridge is tagged with VLAN ID and priority. When this
parameter is set to Yes, the original priority can be copied to the double
tag. When copy origin priority is set to No, the double tag is set with the
default priority tag.
Strip VLAN tag – configurable for Gigabit Ethernet port:
ƒ
The VLAN tag of each received frame can be stripped at the Gigabit
Ethernet port ingress, before the frame enters the bridge. For
single-tagged ports, the frame enters the bridge with the user-defined
PVID and default priority.
Learning Process
The learning process observes the source MAC address (SA) and the VID of the
received frame, and updates the forwarding database with the MAC-VID pair and
with the bridge port that the frame was received from. The Forwarding Data Base
(FDB) is also referred to as the MAC table.
Entries in the MAC table can be dynamic (inserted by the learning process) or
static (inserted by configuration). A dynamic entry has an aging time associated
with it.
The Egate-100 VLAN-aware bridge is an Independent VLAN Learning (IVL) bridge.
The learning process inserts a new dynamic entry into the MAC table. This entry
consists of a MAC-VID pair and bridge port.
•
If the MAC-VID pair already exists for the same port, the aging time is
updated
•
If the MAC-VID pair already exists but for a different bridge port (dynamic
entry), the new entry overrides the existing one
•
If the MAC-VID pair already exists for a different bridge port (static entry), the
static entry prevails.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Functional Description
1-11
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
Aging Process
The aging period for a table entry is the time since the last frame for this entry
entered the bridge.
The aging process checks the forwarding MAC table periodically. Each dynamic
entry for which the aging period has exceeded the configured Aging Time Limit is
deleted. The periodic check of the MAC table (aging time intervals) results in
actual aging time that can reach up to twice the value that was configured by the
user.
Forwarding Process
The forwarding process is performed based on the frame destination MAC-VID
pair. The frame is forwarded to the bridge port that was specified in the MAC
table for this MAC-VID pair entry.
Untagged frames are forwarded according to the PVID that was attached to the
frame during the ingress process.
Frames are forwarded, dropped, or flooded according to these guidelines:
•
Forwarded – if the bridge port of the pair entry (DA, VID) in the MAC table is
both an active bridge port and a member of the VLAN, the frame is forwarded
to that bridge port only.
•
Dropped –
•
ƒ
Local Filtering: If the bridge port for the pair entry (DA, VID) in the MAC
table is the port on which the frame was received, the frame is dropped.
ƒ
If there are no active ports associated with the frame’s VID, the frame is
dropped.
Flooded –
ƒ
If the pair (DA, VID) is not learned and does not exist in the MAC table,
the frame is transmitted to all bridge ports that are associated with the
frame VLAN ID, unless Split Horizon is enabled on the remote side.
ƒ
Multicasts and broadcasts are flooded only through the bridge ports
whose VLAN ID is identical to the frame VLAN ID, unless Split Horizon is
enabled on the remote side.
Egress Process
After the forwarding process identifies the destination bridge port/ports to which
the frame should be transmitted, the transmission process transmits it with the
appropriate format (egress tag-handling configuration).
You can configure the frame format to be used at egress per port:
•
1-12
None (do not strip VLAN) –
ƒ
VLAN-tagged frames are transmitted unchanged, or with PVID tag
stacking if this is enabled
ƒ
Untagged frames are transmitted tagged with the VLAN priority that was
set when entering the Gigabit Ethernet port; VID is the PVID of that port.
Functional Description
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
ƒ
Chapter 1 Introduction
Priority-tagged frames are transmitted tagged with original priority and
VID = PVID
•
Strip VLAN – One level of VLAN is stripped from each frame
•
Stack VLAN – You can configure the Gigabit Ethernet port to have each
outgoing frame stacked with a predefined VLAN ID; the VLAN priority tag is
copied.
VLAN-Unaware Mode
In this mode the bridge forwarding ignores the VLAN ID of VLAN-tagged frames.
Each Ethernet packet received from each bridge port (Gigabit Ethernet or E1/T1s)
is forwarded according to its destination MAC address.
The bridge features in VLAN-unaware mode are:
•
Learning and forwarding according to MAC address only
•
Learning of up to 64,000 MAC addresses
•
MAC learning limit – can be configured for each bridge port
•
Aging time – can be configured at the bridge level
•
VLAN tagged frames transparency (forwarding according to MAC only)
•
MAC table viewing
•
Optional loop detection
•
Ethernet OAM (802.3ah).
Ingress Process
All frames are accepted in this mode: untagged, priority-tagged, or VLAN-tagged.
Learning and forwarding is based on the MAC addresses, independent of the
VLAN. This mode is sometimes referred to as transparent mode, due to
“tag transparency”.
Learning Process
The learning process observes the source MAC address (SA) of the received frame
and updates the forwarding database (FDB) with the MAC and the bridge port
that the frame was received from. The FDB is also referred to as the MAC table.
The learning process inserts a new entry into the MAC table. This entry consists
of MAC and bridge port.
•
If the MAC already exists for the same bridge port, the aging time is updated
•
If the MAC already exists, but for a different bridge port (dynamic entry), the
new entry overrides the existing one.
Aging Process
The aging process checks the forwarding MAC table periodically. Each dynamic
entry aging time period that has exceeded the configured Aging Time Limit is
deleted. The aging time period is the period of time since the last frame for this
entry entered the bridge. The periodic check of the MAC table (aging time
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Functional Description
1-13
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
intervals) results in an actual aging time that can reach up to twice the value that
was configured by the user.
Forwarding Process
The forwarding process is performed based on the frame MAC Destination
Address (DA). The frame is forwarded to the port specified in the MAC table for
this MAC.
Frames are forwarded, dropped, or flooded at this stage for the following reason:
•
Forwarded – A frame will be forwarded according to its DA, to the bridge port
where its DA was learned
•
Dropped – Local filtering: if the port for that DA entry in the MAC table is the
port on which the frame was received, the frame will be dropped
•
Flooded –
ƒ
If there is no information regarding the DA in the MAC table then the
frame is flooded to all ports
ƒ
Frames with multicast or broadcast address are flooded to all ports.
Egress Process
In this bridge mode, the frames are transmitted unchanged: No tags are added or
removed.
VLAN Ethertype
By default, the system uses Ethertype 8100 to identify and manipulate VLAN
frames (including stacking and other actions).
It is possible to configure Egate-100 to use another Ethertype to identify and
manipulate VLAN frames. Thus, Egate-100 can support a proprietary VLAN
Ethertype (9100) or new standards (S-TAG per 802.1ad using 88A8).
The Egate-100 VLAN Ethertype configuration is in effect for any VLAN
identification and operation. Thus, only frames with the configured Ethertype are
identified as VLAN-tagged frames, and all stacking operations are done using the
configured Ethertype.
Split Horizon
The Egate-100 split horizon functionality overrides the VLAN-aware bridge
forwarding rules, and imposes a logical forwarding restriction on the bridge
standard behavior to support certain application requirements.
The basic VLAN-aware bridge forwarding rules determine that bridge ports
sharing the same VLAN act as the same Ethernet segment for this VLAN. This
means that unicast connectivity between the ports is possible and broadcasts,
multicasts, and unknown unicasts are flooded to all ports sharing the same VLAN.
There are applications where remote sites sharing the same VLAN must disable
the local switching performed at Egate-100 between the remote sites. An
example of such an application is Internet Access/DSLAM Aggregation.
There are three options for Split Horizon:
1-14
Functional Description
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
•
Enabling local switching
•
Disabling switching between the PDH ports for all LANs
•
Enabling Split Horizon for specific VLANs. This means that for example
Internet access VLANs may use Split Horizon while other VLANs used for VPNs
between remotes still use the connectivity between the bridge ports at the
Egate-100 level.
Encapsulation
GFP
Egate-100 supports the following two types of GFP:
•
GFP single (non-VCAT, non-LCAS)
•
GFP (multi) VCAT LCAS
GFP Single
Up to 63/84 E1/T1 remotes over single E1/T1 can be supported using Ethernet
over GFP encapsulation. The GFP is as defined in ITU-T G7041 and ITU-T G.8040
and, for virtual concatenation VCAT header only (as non-LCAS transmitter), in
ITU-T G.7043.
GFP VCAT LCAS
Up to 42 E1/T1 remotes over up to 16 E1/T1 links can be supported using
Ethernet over GFP VCAT encapsulation as defined in ITU-T G.8040. The links are
grouped using VCAT as defined in ITU-T G.7043. The LCAS protocol is supported
as defined in ITU-T G7042.
The important features of these NG-PDH standards are:
•
Up to 42 Virtual Concatenation Groups (VCGs) are supported
•
LCAS mechanisms that:
•
ƒ
Ensure that traffic flow recovers quickly from E1/T1 link failures
ƒ
Allow on-the-fly addition/deletion of group members.
Up to 100 ms differential delay.
GFP Technical Overview
TX Traffic Path
In this direction, the ETHERNET packet with the CRC32 is encapsulated into GFP.
The encapsulation can be divided into two main sections: a Core Header and a
Payload Area.
The Core Header contains the packet length and a CRC16 result of the length. It
is used by the frame-delineation procedure (as explained in the RX path
description below) to detect the boundaries of the frame. The Core Header is
scrambled by xoring the 32 bits (length and CRC16) with the 32 bits B6AB31E0.
The scrambling of the GFP Core Header improves the robustness of the frame-
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Functional Description
1-15
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
delineation procedure, and provides a sufficient number of 0-1 and 1-0
transitions during idle transmission periods.
Figure 1-6. GFP Encapsulation
The Payload Area is divided into three subsections: the Payload header, the User
data (Ethernet packet), and an optional FCS (CRC 32) that is calculated on all
payload information filed. For encapsulation of Ethernet frames, this CRC appears
to be unnecessary. The PFCS addition is user configurable.
All octets in the GFP Payload Area are scrambled using a 1 + x^43 scrambler; this
scrambler is always activated.
The Payload Area contains between 4 and 64 bytes, according to the following:
Figure 1-7. GFP Encapsulation – Payload Area
1-16
Functional Description
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
•
PTI – Payload Type Identifier – indicates the content of the GFP frame: user
frame or management frame (Egate-100 does not generate management
frames in the TX direction)
•
PFI – indicates whether the packet includes PFCS
•
EXI – indicates the type of extension header encapsulated in the frame.
Egate-100 supports transmission of a Null extension header (i.e., no
extension header is added)
•
UPI - indicates the type of user data encapsulated in the GFP format.
Egate-100 transmits an Ethernet-over-GFP payload identifier when the GFP
frames are user frames. When there is no user packet to be transmitted over
GFP, Egate-100 generates idle packets.
Idle packets - The GFP Idle frame is a special four-octet GFP control frame
consisting of only a GFP Core Header with the PLI and cHEC fields set to 0. These
frames are generated by the transmitter in order to keep the frame-delineation
mechanism in the far-end receiver in a sync state.
The GFP signal is mapped into TDM according to the following. The procedure of
mapping the GFP packets over the PDH signals is described in the G-8040
standard.
•
The PDH signal works in multiframe mode: CRC-4 multiframe mode for E1 (31
timeslots) and ESF framing mode for T1 (24 timeslots) are supported
•
The first timeslot in each multiframe is used for transferring the VCAT header
information
•
In all other timeslots there is user data after the encapsulation of GFP
according to G-7041 (as described above).
The VCAT header information is the LCAS CONTROL packet, as described in the
G-7043 standard. One control packet is transmitted in a period of
16 multiframes.
Egate-100 works as a non-LCAS transmitter; all the fields such as MST, RSACK,
SQ, GID, CONTROL & CRC & MFI2 MSB are set to zero. The MFI 1 parameter is
incremented in a round-robin manner.
Figure 1-8. GFP Mapping over the PDH Signal
RX Traffic Path
The traffic received from TDM ports is assumed by Egate-100 to be traffic arriving
from a non-LCAS GFP transmitter. Egate-100 hence treats the data according to
the following:
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Functional Description
1-17
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
•
VCAT header extraction: The VCAT header is extracted from the first timeslot
of each multiframe.
•
Frame Delineation: The frame border is recognized by synchronization on the
core header which contains the frame length & CRC16 on the length (see
Figure 1-9). The GFP LINK is kept in sync state if the cHEC is correct per
frame. To insure that the GFP LINK is always synchronized, the transmitter in
Egate-100 generates idle frames, with the Delta parameter equal to 2.
Figure 1-9. GFP Frame Delineation
•
Single-bit error correction: The GFP receiver has the ability to correct a
single-bit error in Thec or Chec or Ehec. This function is always active. The
single-bit error correction on Chec is not active when the GFP signal is in
Presync or hunt state.
The data is also descrambled (during sync state) before the packets are
transferred to the bridge.
Payload FCS / CRC 32 of Ethernet packet check: The GFP receiver checks that the
payload FCS (if enabled) or the CRC32 of Ethernet is correct. If incorrect, it
discards the packet.
GFP over PDH actual bandwidth: GFP mapping over a PDH signal involves the
following overhead:
•
The PDH signal works in multiframe mode. For E1, TS0 is used for frame
synchronization, and for T1, the F bit is used.
•
Space is also reserved for a VCAT header every multiframe.
From this it can be determined that the actual PDH rate for GFP frames is as
follows:
•
for E1 links: (2.048Mbs –64Kbps – 64/16 k) = 1.98Mbs
• for T1 links: (1.544Mbs –8Kbps – 64/24 k) ~1.533Mbs. The overall
calculation must also take into account the following overhead for GFP
encapsulation:
1-18
Functional Description
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
•
Chec_O (Core header encapsulation) – four bytes (always added to the
packet)
•
Thec_O (Type header encapsulation) – four 4 bytes (always added to the
packet)
•
Ehec_O (Linear extension header encapsulation) – four bytes (optional;
user-configurable)
•
P_FCS (Payload FCS -CRC32) – four bytes (optional; user-configurable).
The maximum PPS (packets per second) that can be generated on the PDH is thus
determined as follows (where P_SIZE is the packet size, and other parameters are
as described above):
•
for E1 links: PPS =1.98Mbs/ 8/ ( P_SIZE + Chec_O + Thec_O + Ehec_O + P_FCS )
•
for T1 links: PPS ~1.533Mbs / 8/ ( P_SIZE + Chec_O + Thec_O + Ehec_O +
P_FCS).
In Egate-100:
•
EHEC_O is 0
•
P_FCS is user-configurable.
Statistics
Statistics include:
•
Tx underrun
•
Transmitted correct frames
•
Transmitted correct octets
•
Received correct frames
•
Received correct octets
•
FCS errors (in GFP, RX_CRC32_ERROR).
In GFP encapsulation Egate-100 supports the following additional statistics:
•
Link State (In sync / Out of sync)
•
Rx GFP data Not Valid
•
Rx Single Bit Corrected
•
Rx_Thec_Multi_Error
•
Rx_Ehec_Multi_Error.
HDLC
Up to 126 E1/T1 remotes over unframed or fractional E1/T1 can be supported
using Ethernet over HDLC encapsulation.
Synchronous HDLC protocol is a bit-oriented protocol, where data is transmitted
in frames. Each frame starts and ends with a flag (7E hex). All frames contain a
16-bit CRC field. Zero-bit insertion is used, to allow the contents of the frame to
be transparent. Zero-bit insertion means that a binary 0 is inserted after a
succession of five 1s within a frame (i.e., between flags).
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Functional Description
1-19
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
Frame boundaries are defined by flags and all frames are transmitted with a
16-bit CRC.
The 32-bit LAN CRC is not transmitted over the E1/T1. No PPP or other headers
are added to the Ethernet frame with this encapsulation.
PPP/BCP
Up to 126 E1/T1 remotes over unframed or fractional E1/T1 can be supported
using Ethernet over PPP/BCP encapsulation, with an HDLC CRC of 16 bits. The LAN
FCS is stripped and not transmitted over the link.
The supported PPP/BCP protocols are:
•
•
LCP (Line Control Protocol) as per RFC 1661
ƒ
User-configurable protocol field compression
ƒ
User-configurable address and control field compression
ƒ
Echo request and answer support
ƒ
Max MRU of 1543 bytes (corresponds to 1536-byte frames)
ƒ
Not supported: Authentication
NCP of type BCP, as per RFC 3518, with MACs support according to 802.3.
LCP/BCP status alarms can be included, as per user configuration.
Multilink PPP
Egate-100 allows the establishment of Ethernet service with bandwidths over the
E1/T1 rate by binding up to eight E1 links or up to eight T1 links into one logical
link, using MLPPP. A logical port associated with these E1/T1 links can represent
(n 2Mb)/(n 1.5Mb) of Ethernet traffic where n is the number of links.
MLPPP features include:
•
Support of up to 42 MLPPP bundles for E1/T1
•
Support of up to eight E1/T1 channels by each bundle
•
Unframed or fractional E1/T1 with 31/24 timeslots assigned
•
Recovery mechanism upon E1 or T1 link failure: shift from n x E1/T1 to (n-1)
E1/T1
•
Worst case of 16 msec-delay compensation buffer for 64-byte frames. For
larger frames the delay compensation grows linearly: for example, 128-byte
frames with a delay compensation of 32 msec
•
Support of packet fragmentation.
The supported MLPPP protocols are:
•
1-20
LCP (Line Control Protocol) as per RFC 1661
ƒ
Echo request and answer support
ƒ
Max MRU of 1543 bytes (corresponds to 1536-byte frames)
ƒ
Authentication – not supported
ƒ
Protocol field compression, address and control field compression –
not supported
Functional Description
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
•
MLPPP as per RFC 1990
•
MLPPP extension to LCP as per RFC 1990: supports 24-bit sequence number
•
BCP (Bridge Control Protocol) per RFC 3518
•
Loop Detection on the LCP level.
Timing
System Clock (E1/T1 Source Clock)
Egate-100 has a single clock domain and functions as the clock master. All
remote units operate in loopback timing (LBT) mode and use Egate-100 as their
timing source.
With SDH/SONET interface, system clock options are:
•
SDH/SONET Rx
•
Internal clock.
With DS3 interface, the system clock options are:
•
One of the DS3 Rxs
•
Internal clock.
Quality of Service
Egate-100 supports QoS mapping with up to four strict priority queues at the
logical port egress according to one of the following:
•
VLAN priority (available in VLAN-aware bridge mode only)
•
IP precedence (ToS byte)
•
DSCP (ToS byte).
IP Precedence / DSCP
The IP header is shown in Figure 1-10. ToS byte structure for IP Precedence is
shown in Figure 1-11 and for DSCP in Figure 1-12.
Non-IP frames are mapped to the lowest-priority queue.
0
0
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
IP
HEADER
VERSION
IHL
TOTAL LENGTH
TOS
IDENTIFICATION
FLAGS
FRAGMENT OFFSET
TIME TO LIVE
PROTOCOL
HEADER CHECKSUM
SOURCE ADDRESS
DESTINATION ADDRESS
OPTIONS
PADDING
Figure 1-10. IP Header
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Functional Description
1-21
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
Bit 0
Bit 1
P2
Bit 2
P1
Bit 3
P0
Bit 4
XX
Bit 5
XX
Bit 6
XX
XX
Bit 7
XX
P2–P0: Precedence value
Figure 1-11. ToS Byte IP Precedence Field
Bit 0
Bit 1
DS5
Bit 2
DS4
Bit 3
DS3
Bit 4
DS2
Bit 5
DS1
Bit 6
DS0
XX
Bit 7
XX
DSCP: six bits (DS5–DS0)
Figure 1-12. ToS Byte DSCP Field
VLAN Priority
VLAN, according to IEEE 802.1p&q, adds four bytes to the MAC layer of the
Ethernet frame. The user can set the contents of these bytes, MAC layer priority
and VLAN ID.
Figure 1-13 shows the VLAN tag format.
00
8
802.1D Tag Protocol Type
6
Priority
VID
CFI = 0
user_priority
81
5
4
1
8
1
VLAN ID
Figure 1-13. VLAN Tag Format (802.1)
Untagged frames are tagged by the Egate PVID. VLAN priority is set to 0 in this
case, and the frame is mapped accordingly.
In the case of tag stacking, the original VLAN priority is copied to the new VLAN
and the frame is mapped according to this value.
Flooding
The user can choose how to map each one of the following frame types:
1-22
•
Multicasts
•
Broadcasts
•
Unknown unicasts.
Functional Description
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Buffer Management
Egate-100 has a total of 2500 frame buffers, and frames in each buffer are
limited in size by maximum frame length.
Each bridge port priority queue (at egress) has a configurable threshold. When a
frame enters the bridge, it is assigned for transmission to the appropriate bridge
port based on the functioning of the bridge, and to the appropriate bridge port
priority queue based on the packet’s priority fields.
If the number of packets in the bridge port priority queue exceeds the configured
threshold, the incoming packet is dropped. Otherwise, it is queued for transmission.
A second threshold is used at the level of a group of priority queues. For each
priority level, a threshold can be configured for the group of all priority queues
(of the E1/T1 bridge ports) of that priority level. Before a packet is queued for
transmission, both thresholds (individual and group) are checked.
The buffer-management scheme described allows for over-subscription of buffers
(Number-of-bridge-ports x Packet-threshold > 2500) to allow for a high burst
tolerance at the bridge port level while preventing the high-priority queues from
suffering buffer starvation.
The setting also includes the Gigabit Ethernet buffer threshold. Proper design of
the setting ensures that there is no buffer starvation for the Gigabit Ethernet
interface regardless of E1/T1 buffer state:
E1/T1-threshold + Gigabit Ethernet threshold = 2500.
All thresholds are configurable, and the user may modify settings as well as
specify the desired amount of oversubscription, if any.
Management
Egate-100 can be monitored locally from an ASCII terminal or from a remote site
using Telnet or the ConfiguRAD Web-based application. The RADview Lite
application is also supported.
Inband Management
E-gate100 supports inband management via Telnet, Web, and RADView Lite.
Configuration, monitoring, and statistics are available.
Out-of-Band Management
Egate-100 allows full configuration and diagnostics via ASCII terminal or Fast
Ethernet management port. The ASCII terminal is connected to the control port in
the Egate-100 front panel.
An explanation of ASCII terminal activation is provided in Chapter 3 including
general instructions for navigating through the system menus and windows and
modifying data.
Note
For out-of-band management, the second Gigabit Ethernet port can be used to
connect to the management network. If you use the second Gigabit Ethernet port
for management, it is recommended to operate the port at 100Mbps to minimize
the impact of management traffic bursts on Gigabit Ethernet user traffic.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Functional Description
1-23
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
Security
ASCII terminal, Telnet, and Web access are password protected. After a period of
15 minutes of inactivity during which no character was sent to the terminal, the
system exits to the password screen and the Telnet or Web session is closed.
Egate-100 supports the following access authorization levels and mechanisms:
•
Superuser mode for configuration and monitoring
•
User mode for monitoring and configuration view only
•
Radius support for password authentication and management.
Egate-100 also supports secured Telnet and Web access using SSL/SSH. The
security level is user-configurable:
•
Access enabled
•
Secured access (SSL/SSH only)
•
Managers only (access allowed only for stations on the Manager List)
•
Access disabled (no access to Telnet or Web).
Management Access
Egate-100 architecture allows access from the Gigabit Ethernet network port to
the Egate-100 host and remote site devices. In VLAN-aware mode, separation of
management traffic from user traffic can be achieved by use of different VLANs.
In the scenario illustrated by Figure 1-14, traffic coming from the remote CPE
uses two VLANs: One VLAN used for user traffic, for which the CPE may use tag
stacking; the second is used for management traffic. All CPEs connected to the
Egate-100 share the same management VLAN.
In VLAN-aware mode, Egate-100 forwards management traffic to the network
management station in the Ethernet network. As a different VLAN is used,
separation between user traffic and management traffic is maintained.
Figure 1-14. Management Traffic in a VLAN-Aware Application
1-24
Functional Description
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Loop Detection
Egate-100 functions as a VLAN-aware bridge (L2 Ethernet switch) with PDH links
(E1/T1s) as the bridge ports.
E1/T1 loops are quite common in PDH networks (for diagnostic purposes, among
others). These can in turn produce Ethernet loops, resulting in Ethernet network
problems. Egate-100 features mechanisms to detect E1/T1 loops and avoid
Ethernet loops by disabling the bridge port. When the loop is released, Egate-100
automatically recovers.
The loop detection uses the following mechanisms according to the
encapsulation mode:
•
For GFP VCAT mode, loop detection is performed on each channel using the
VCAT mechanism to detect a loop on the channel
•
For PPP and MLPPP modes, the PPP LCP mechanism is used for loop detection
•
For other modes including GFP single mode, the loop detection mechanism is
based on transmission of periodic Ethernet frames over the link; if the frames
are detected back at the sending port, a loop is declared.
The loop detection frames are frames with SA=DA of the originating Egate-100
device, so they do not propagate in the network beyond the opposite
Ethernet/PDH bridge port (RICi-E1/T1 or other).
The loop detection frames are tagged with a VLAN ID that is predefined by the
user; This VLAN ID should not be used for a user traffic VLAN.
Loop detection frames are sent every five seconds. If a loop detection frame is
received back at the sending port, a loop is declared and transmission at the
bridge port is shut down. Egate-100 continues to send loop detection frames,
and detects the end of the loop after three consecutive loop detection frames do
not return, upon which transmission resumes at the bridge port.
Diagnostics
Several types of diagnostics and troubleshooting procedures are available:
•
Ping test and self-test
•
E1/T1 PRBS tests for E1/T1
•
Events/traps.
Alarms and traps can be masked by user configuration.
For more information, refer to Chapter 6.
Note
Hierarchically-layered traps/alarms – events resulting from events that were
already reported and are still active – are not sent. For example, LOF event traps
are not sent if LOS was sent and the physical layer problem persists.
Statistics Collection
Egate-100 provides the following diagnostic information:
•
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Statistics and counter capability at the bridge port level.
Functional Description
1-25
Chapter 1 Introduction
•
Installation and Operation Manual
Active alarms and a log file at STM-1/OC-3, channelized T3, Gigabit Ethernet, and
system levels.
For more information, see Chapter 6.
Configuration Reset
When required, the Egate-100 configuration parameters can be reset to their
default values. In addition to resetting to the factory-set values, Egate-100 allows
you to save the current settings as the device default settings, replacing the original
factory default settings. It is then possible to return to the saved settings when
using the Reset to Factory Defaults option from the configuration menu.
When required, the saved settings can be erased completely, restored the default
settings to the original factory default values.
1.4
Gigabit
Ethernet
Interface
Technical Specifications
Number of Ports
2
Compliance
IEEE 802.3u, 802.3x, 802.1p, and 802.3q
Data Rate
1000 Mbps
Frame Size
Regular (1600 bytes)
Duplex Mode
Full duplex
Max Frame Size
1600 bytes
Interface Connector
10/100/1000BaseT – Electrical interface, RJ-45
Connector
1000BaseSx – Optical interface (SFP), LC Connector
1000BaseLx – Optical interface (SFP), LC Connector
Range
10/100/1000BaseT – 100 meters/328 feet over UTP
Cat. 5 cable
1000BaseSx – 220m/720 ft over 62.5 μm multimode
fiber or 500m/1640 ft over 50 μm multimode fiber
1000BaseLx – 10 km/6.2 miles over 9 μm single
mode fiber
Wavelength
1000BaseSx – 850 nm
1000BaseLx – 1310 nm
1-26
Technical Specifications
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Optical input range
Chapter 1 Introduction
Single mode: -8 to -20 dBm
Multimode: 0 to -17 dBm
STM-1/OC-3
Interface
Optical output
power
Single mode: -3 to -9.5 dBm
Electrical Cable Type
Category 5 UTP/STP. For cables longer than
30 meters (98 feet), it is recommended to use
shielded cables.
Number of Ports
2
APS
Unidirectional
Multimode: 0 to -9.5 dBm
1+1 Optimized bidirectional
(compliant with G.841 Annex B)
Compliance
G.957 S1.1, G.957 L1.1,
ANSI T1.646, G. 825 (jitter),
G.841 (APS)
Connector
LC (SFP)
Data Rate
155 Mbps
Options
Single mode 1310 short haul G.957 S1.1
Single mode 1310 long haul G.957 L1.1
Multimode ANSI T1.646
Range
Single mode long haul: 40 km (25 miles)
Single mode short haul: 15 km (9.3 miles)
Multimode: 2 km (1.2 miles)
Wavelength
1310 nm
Optical input range
Single mode long haul: -10 to -34 dBm
Single mode short haul: -8 to -28 dBm
Multimode: -14 to -30 dBm
Optical output
power
Single mode long haul: 0 to -5 dBm
Single mode short haul: -8 to -15 dBm
Multimode: -14 to -20 dBm
Channelized T3
Interface
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Number of Ports
3 (according to ordering option)
Connector
BNC, 75 ohm
Compliance
T1.107, GR-499-CORE
Technical Specifications
1-27
Chapter 1 Introduction
Internal Bridge
Installation and Operation Manual
Data Rate
44,736 Mbps
Range
100 meters (328 feet)
Mapping
28 T1s mapped over T3 via M13
Framing
M23 or C-Bit parity
Number of Ports
Up to 130 including:
• Gigabit Ethernet (2)
• Ethernet management port
• Local host
• ETH o E1/T1s o STM-1/OC-3 (up to 126)
or ETH o T1s o T3
LAN Table
Up to 64,000 MAC addresses (learned, automatic
aging check)
Operation Mode
VLAN-aware, VLAN-unaware
Buffer
2500 frames
Filtering and
Forwarding
Up to 253,000 pps (full CH-STM-1 capacity)
Classification
802.1p, DSCP, and IP precedence
Congestion
Management
Four strict priority queues
Protocols
Types
HDLC, PPP, PPP/BCP, MLPPP, GFP (with and without
VCAT LCAS)
ETH over GFP
Single
Encapsulation
ETH over GFP single (non-VCAT, non-LCAS)
Compliance
G.7041, G.8040 and, for concatenation header only
(as non-LCAS transmitter), ITU-T G.7043
Encapsulation
ETH over GFP VCAT LCAS (multi)
Compliance
G.7041, G.8040, G.7042, G.7043
Encapsulation
ETH o PPP o MLPPP o HDLC o (n x E1/T1)
Control Protocols
LCP, BCP
Delay Compensation
Up to 16 ms delay compensation
Quality of
Service
ETH over GFP
VCAT LCAS
ETH over MLPPP
1-28
Technical Specifications
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
Max Transmit Unit
64 to 1540 bytes
Compliance
RFC 1661 – PPP protocol
RFC 1662 – PPP in HDLC-like framing
RFC 3518 – PPP BCP (bridging-control protocol)
RFC 1990 – PPP multilink protocol
ETH over PPP
Encapsulation
ETH over PPP over HDLC over E1/T1
Control Protocols
LCP, BCP
Compliance
RFC 1661 – PPP protocol
RFC 1662 – PPP in HDLC-like framing
RFC 3518 – PPP BCP (bridging-control protocol)
ETH over HDLC
Encapsulation
ETH over HDLC over E1/T1:
RAD-proprietary protocols
Remote Devices
Up to 126 devices
Standard
Compliance
MEF
MEF 9 EPL
10/100BaseT
Management
Port
Compliance
IEEE 802.3
Operation
Full duplex, autonegotiation
Interface
RS-232/V.24 (DCE asynchronous)
Data Rate
9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2 kbps (user-configurable)
Connector
9-pin, D-type, female (DB-9)
Statistics
System and physical layer alarms
Control Port
Monitoring
ETH over E1 frame counters
Gigabit Ethernet physical layer alarms and frame
counters
Indicators
POWER
(green/red)
(LED on PS module)
Green: Power supply is functioning properly
ALM (red)
On: Alarm exists for interface (GbE, SDH/SONET / T3)
or system
Red: Power supply is faulty or not connected to
electrical output.
Off: No Alarm
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Technical Specifications
1-29
Chapter 1 Introduction
Installation and Operation Manual
ACT (yellow)
Blinking: Ethernet frame received or sent within the
last second
Off: No frame received or sent within the last second
SYNC (green)
On: STM-1 port is synchronized
Off: LOS, LOF
Power
Physical
Environment
1-30
AC Source
100–240 VAC (±10%), 50/60 Hz
DC Source
48/60 VDC nominal (40–72 VDC)
Power Consumption
40W max
Height
43.7 mm (1.7 in)
Width
440 mm (17.3 in)
Depth
240 mm (9.4 in)
Weight
Single power supply: 3.5 kg (7.7 lb)
Dual power supply 4.0 kg (8.8 lb)
Temperature
0°–50°C (32°–122°F)
Humidity
Up to 90%, non–condensing
Technical Specifications
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Chapter 2
Installation and Setup
This chapter describes installation and setup procedures for the Egate-100 unit.
After installing the unit, refer to Chapter 3 for operating instructions.
If a problem is encountered, refer to Chapter 6 for test and diagnostic
instructions.
Egate-100 ships completely assembled. It is designed for installation as a desktop
unit or mounted in a 19-inch rack. For rack installation instructions, refer to the
documentation that comes with the RM kit.
Internal settings, adjustment, maintenance, or repairs must be performed only by
a skilled technician who is aware of the hazards involved.
Warning
Warning
Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation, and
maintenance of this product.
For your protection and to prevent possible damage if a fault condition such as a
lightning strike or contact with high voltage power lines occurs on the cables
connected to the equipment, Egate-100 must be properly grounded at all times.
Any interruption of the protective (grounding) connection inside or outside the
equipment, or disconnection of the protective ground terminal, can make this
equipment dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
2.1
Site Requirements and Prerequisites
AC-powered Egate-100 units should be installed within 1.5 meters (5 feet) of an
easily accessible and grounded AC outlet, capable of furnishing the required
supply voltage in the range of 100 to 240 VAC, at 50/60 Hz.
DC-powered Egate-100 units should be connected to -48 or -60 VDC mains in
accordance with the DC Connection Supplement.
Allow at least 90 cm (36 in) of frontal clearance for operator access. For
continuous product operation allow at least 10 cm of frontal clearance, and at
least 15 cm at rear of the unit, for cable connections and ventilation. For proper
ventilation, keep at least 2.5 cm clearance from the sides and top of the product.
The ambient operating temperature of Egate-100 is 0° to 50° C (32° to 122°F), at
a relative humidity of up to 90%, non-condensing.
Note
See also the sections describing connections of AC and DC mains at the beginning
of this manual.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Site Requirements and Prerequisites
2-1
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup
2.2
Installation and Operation Manual
Package Contents
The Egate-100 package contains:
•
Egate-100 unit
•
SFP modules (if ordered)
•
AC power cord (for AC option)
•
DC connection kit (for DC option)
•
CBL-DB9F-DB9M-STR straight cable for ASCII terminal connection (if ordered)
•
RM-34 (if ordered) for mounting one Egate-100 unit in a 19-inch rack
•
WM-34 (if ordered) for mounting one Egate-100 unit on the wall.
2.3
Required Equipment
Egate-100 requires no special tools for installation. You need a screwdriver to
mount Egate-100 in a 19-inch rack. You need a screwdriver and drill to mount
Egate-100 on the wall.
Removing/installing the hot-swappable AC/DC units requires a flathead
screwdriver.
Egate-100 comes equipped with an appropriate (country or region dependent)
power cord to be connected from the power socket to the mains.
Refer to Table 2-1 to determine which cables and connectors are required for
installation.
Table 2-1. Required Connectors
Interface
Cable/Connector
Control port
Straight RS-232/V.24 cable with DB-9 female connector
for ASCII terminal
Fast Ethernet management
port
RJ-45, 8-pin connector
SDH/SONET interfaces
LC (SFP) fiber optic connector
Channelized T3 interface
BNC connector
Gigabit Ethernet interfaces
Electrical: RJ-45, 8-pin connector
Optical: LC (SFP) fiber optic connector
2-2
Required Equipment
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
2.4
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup
Mounting the Unit
Egate-100 is designed for installation as a desktop unit or mounted in a rack.
•
For rack-mounting instructions, refer to the installation kit manual.
•
If Egate-100 is to be used as a desktop unit, place and secure the unit on a
stable, non-movable surface.
Refer to the clearance and temperature requirements in Site Requirements and
Prerequisites.
2.5
Installing Fiber Optic SFP Modules
Egate-100 uses SFP modules with LC fiber optic connectors that provide
hot-swappable industry-standard interfaces.
Third-party SFP optical transceivers must be agency-approved, complying with the
local laser safety regulations for Class 1 laser equipment.
Warning
³
To install the SFP modules:
1. Lock the wire latch of each SFP module by lifting it up until it clicks into place,
as illustrated in Figure 2-1.
Note
Some SFP models have a plastic door instead of a wire latch.
Figure 2-1. Locking the SFP Wire Latch
2. Carefully remove the dust covers from the SFP slot.
3. Insert the rear end of SFP into the socket, and push slowly backwards to
mate the connectors until the SFP clicks into place. If you feel resistance
before the connectors are fully mated, retract the SFP using the latch wire as
a pulling handle, and then repeat the procedure.
4. Remove the protective rubber caps from the SFP modules.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installing Fiber Optic SFP Modules
2-3
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup
Installation and Operation Manual
To remove SFP module:
³
1. Disconnect the fiber optic cables from the SFP module.
2. Unlock the wire latch by lowering it downwards (as opposed to locking).
3. Hold the wire latch and pull the SFP module out of the Ethernet port.
2.6
Connecting to Channelized T3 Equipment
The Egate-100 channelized T3 interface terminates in three pairs of
BNC connectors.
To connect the T3 interface:
³
•
TX
Connect Egate-100 to the T3 equipment using BNC cables terminated with
BNC connectors.
TX
RX
CH1
TX
RX
CH2
RX
LINK
CH3
RDY
LINK
LINK
ALM
ACT
ACT
Egate-100
MNG-ETH
CONTROL
1
2
GbE
DCE
Figure 2-2. T3 BNC Connectors
2.7
Connecting to SDH/SONET Equipment
The Egate-100 SDH/SONET network port terminates in a fiber optic interface with
LC connectors (SDH/SONET).
To connect the SDH/SONET network equipment:
³
•
Connect Egate-100 to the SDH/SONET network equipment using a standard
fiber optic cable terminated with an LC connector. Refer to Installing Fiber
Optic SFP Modules for details on installing fiber optic SFPs.
STM-1/OC-3
RDY
1
Egate-100
STM-1/OC-3
SYNC
LINK
SYNC
2
LINK
MNG-ETH
LINK
CONTROL
ALM
1
ACT
2
ACT
GbE
DCE
Figure 2-3. SDH/SONET SFP Connectors
2-4
Connecting to SDH/SONET Equipment
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
2.8
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup
Connecting to Gigabit Ethernet Equipment
The Egate-100 GbE interface terminates in 8-pin RJ-45 (electrical) or LC (optical)
connectors.
To connect to the Gigabit Ethernet equipment with fiber optic SFP:
³
•
Connect Egate-100 to the Gigabit Ethernet network equipment using a
standard fiber optic cable terminated with an LC connector. Refer to Installing
Fiber Optic SFP Modules for details on installing fiber optic SFPs.
STM-1/OC-3
1
RDY
Egate-100
STM-1/OC-3
SYNC
SYNC
LINK
2
LINK
MNG-ETH
LINK
CONTROL
ALM
ACT
1
ACT
2
GbE
DCE
Figure 2-4: Gigabit Ethernet SFP Connectors
To connect to the Gigabit Ethernet equipment with a copper interface:
³
•
Note
Connect Egate-100 to the Gigabit Ethernet network equipment using a
standard straight UTP/STP cable terminated with an RJ-45 connector.
When connecting Gigabit Ethernet cables longer than 30 meters (98 feet), it is
recommended to use shielded cables.
STM-1/OC-3
Egate-100
STM-1/OC-3
SYNC
1
SYNC
LINK
2
MNG-ETH
RDY
CONTROL
ALM
GbE
LINK
1
2
DCE
Figure 2-5: Gigabit Ethernet 10/100/1000BaseT Electrical Connectors
2.9
Connecting to Management Stations
Egate-100 can be connected to a local ASCII terminal via the CONTROL port or to
a remote network management station via dedicated Ethernet management port.
Connecting to the Terminal
Egate-100 is connected to an ASCII terminal via a 9-pin D-type female connector
designated CONTROL. Refer to Appendix A for the connector pinout.
³
To connect to the terminal:
1. Connect the male 9-pin D-type connector of CBL-DB9F-DB9M-STR straight
cable available from RAD to the CONTROL connector.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Connecting to Management Stations
2-5
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup
Installation and Operation Manual
2. Connect the other connector of the CBL-DB9F-DB9M-STR cable to an ASCII
terminal.
STM-1/OC-3
1
RDY
Egate-100
STM-1/OC-3
SYNC
SYNC
LINK
2
LINK
MNG-ETH
LINK
CONTROL
ALM
ACT
1
ACT
2
GbE
DCE
Figure 2-6: CONTROL Connector
Connecting to the Network Management Station
Egate-100 is connected to an NMS via an 8-pin RJ-45 connector designated
MNG ETH. Refer to Appendix A for the connector pinout.
To connect to an NMS:
³
•
Connect Egate-100 to a hub or switch using a straight cable
or
•
Note
Connect Egate-100 to a network interface card using a cross cable.
When connecting Fast Ethernet cables longer than 30 meters (98 feet), it is
recommended to use shielded cables.
STM-1/OC-3
RDY
1
Egate-100
STM-1/OC-3
SYNC
LINK
SYNC
2
LINK
MNG-ETH
LINK
CONTROL
ALM
1
ACT
2
ACT
GbE
DCE
Figure 2-7: Fast Ethernet Management Connector
2.10 Connecting to Power
Egate-100 can be ordered with either AC power or DC power (single or dual
power supply).
Connecting to AC Power
AC power is supplied to Egate-100 via a standard 3-prong plug.
AC power should be supplied through the 1.5m (5 ft) standard power cable
terminated by a 3-prong plug. The cable is provided with the unit.
2-6
Connecting to Power
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Warning
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup
Before connecting or disconnecting any communication cable, the unit must be
grounded by connecting its power cord to a power outlet with a ground terminal,
and by connecting the ground terminal on the panel (if provided) to a protective
ground.
Interrupting the protective (ground) conductor inside or outside the unit, or
disconnecting the protective ground terminal may render this unit dangerous.
Intentional interruption is prohibited.
If the Egate-100 unit is equipped with two hot-swappable power supplies,
DO NOT install AC and DC power supplies together in the same unit.
³
To connect AC power:
1. Verify that the AC outlet is grounded properly. Ensure that the supply voltage
is in the range 100 VAC to 240 VAC
2. Connect the power cable to a power connector on the Egate-100 front panel.
3. Connect the power cable to the mains.
The unit turns on automatically.
Connecting to DC Power
³
To connect DC power:
•
Refer to the DC power supply connection supplement, located on the
Technical Documentation CD or at the end of this manual. Also, refer to the
safety instructions at the beginning of this document.
Replacing AC/DC Hot-Swappable Power Supply Unit
Egate-100 can contain one or two hot-swappable power-supply units (AC or DC)
that are located in two slots, PS1 and PS2, on the front panel. The following
instructions describe the installation or replacement of either of the units.
Caution
³
DO NOT install AC and DC power supplies together in the same unit.
To replace a power supply unit:
1. Disconnect Egate-100 from mains.
The green power indicator(s) on the right side of the front panel turns
off.
2. Disconnect power cables as follows:
ƒ
AC power supply: Disconnect the power cable.
ƒ
DC power supply: Remove the cable screws connected to the hex nuts on
the PS panel.
3. Using a flathead screwdriver, loosen the two tightening screws that secure
the unit to the chassis.
4. Carefully pull and remove the power supply from the chassis.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Connecting to Power
2-7
Chapter 2 Installation and Setup
Installation and Operation Manual
5. Slide the new power supply into its slot until the unit is firmly in place.
6. Secure the new power supply unit with the two tightening screws as follows:
ƒ
DC power supply: Lock the DC connector by inserting the two
locking-cable screws into the hex nuts on the power supply panel.
ƒ
AC power supply: Connect the power cable connector to the power
supply.
Figure 2-8. AC Power Supply Unit
2-8
Connecting to Power
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Chapter 3
Operation
This chapter:
•
Explains power-on and power-off procedures
•
Provides a detailed description of the front panel controls and indicators and
their functions
•
Provides instructions for using a terminal connected to the Egate-100 control
port
•
Describes how to navigate menus
•
Illustrates the management menu tree.
3.1
³
Turning On the Unit
To turn on the unit:
•
AC power: Connect the unit to AC mains using a RAD-supplied power cable.
•
DC power: Use the circuit breaker in the building installation to turn the
Egate-100 unit on, connecting the terminals on the DC plug to the DC mains.
The PWR indicator lights up and remains lit as long as Egate-100 receives
power.
Egate-100 requires no operator attention once installed, with the exception of
occasional monitoring of the front panel indicators. Intervention is only required
when the unit must be configured to its operational requirements, or when
diagnostic tests are performed.
3.2
Indicators
The unit's LEDs are located on the front panel as illustrated in Figure 3-1.
Table 3-1 lists the functions of the LED indicators.
STM-1/OC-3
RDY
1
Egate-100
STM-1/OC-3
SYNC
LINK
SYNC
2
LINK
MNG-ETH
LINK
CONTROL
ALM
1
ACT
2
ACT
GbE
DCE
Figure 3-1. Egate-100 Front Panel (Dual Power Supply Version)
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Indicators
3-1
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 3-1. Egate-100 LED Indicators
Name
Color
Function
POWER
Green/Red
Green: Power supply performing properly
Red: Power supply error or disconnected
RDY
Green
On: Self test completed successfully
Blinking: Self test failed
ALM
Red
On: Interface or system alarm activated
Off: No Alarm
LINK (GbE)
Green
On: Ethernet connection is up
Off: Ethernet connection is down
ACT (GbE)
Yellow
Blinking: Ethernet frame was received or sent
within the last second
SYNC 1
Green
On: STM-1 port is synchronized
Off: LOS, LOF
SYNC 2
3.3
Default Settings
Table 3-2 lists the default settings of the Egate-100 configuration parameters.
Table 3-2. Default Settings
3-2
Component
Parameter
Default Value
System
Device Name
EGATE-100
Location
The Location of this Device
Contact Person
Name of Contact Person
IP address
0.0.0.0
IP mask
0.0.0.0
Default gateway
0.0.0.0
Read community
Public
Write community
(null)
Trap community
(null)
Host Tagging
Untagged
Host VLAN ID
1
Host Priority Tag
0
Baud rate
115,200 bps
Master Clock Source
Rx Clock (SONET/SDH Rx)
Default Settings
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Component
SDH/SONET Port
Channelized-T3 Port
GbE Port
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Chapter 3 Operation
Parameter
Default Value
Fallback Clock Source
Rx Clock (SONET/SDH Rx)
Max Buffers
100
Rx Clock port number
(T3 option)
1
Syslog
Disable
Admin Status
Up
Alarm
Unmasked
Frame type
SDH
Tx clock
Loopback Timing
SOH Alarms
Unmasked
HVC Alarms
Unmasked
LVC Alarms
Unmasked
APS Protection
No
APS Mode
1+1 optimized bidirectional
APS Working Port
1
APS Wait to Restore
300
APS Command
No Command
APS Flip upon SD
No
Mapping
Enabled
E1/T1 Frame Type
Unframed
E1/T1 Idle Code
0
E1/T1 Alarms
Unmasked
Admin Status
Up
Transmit source clock
Internal
Frame Type
M23
Line Length
Short
Alarms
Unmasked
Alarms
Unmasked
Autonegotiation
Enabled
GbE Aggregation
Disabled
Default Settings
3-3
Chapter 3 Operation
Component
Parameter
Default Value
Logical Ports
Port Name
Logical Port [port-number]
Type
HDLC
Alarms
Unmasked
VLAN-Mode
VLAN-Unaware
Aging Time
300
Split Horizon
Disable
Loop Detection
Disable
VLAN Loop Detection
1
Ethertype
8100
Remote Terminal
Disable
Admin Status
Up
Ingress Filtering
Disable
Accept Frame Type
All
Port VID
2
Default Priority Tag
0
Replace Priority
No
Copy Origin Priority
No
Egress Tag Handling
None
Ingress Tag Handling
None
Maximum Learning
MAC Address
64000
Loop Detection
Enable
Link OAM (802.3ah)
Disable
Bridge
Bridge Ports
3-4
Installation and Operation Manual
Default Settings
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
3.4
Chapter 3 Operation
Configuration and Management Alternatives
You can manage and configure Egate-100 using out-of band management or
inband management interfaces. Refer to the respective section for further
information and instructions:
•
Working with Terminal
•
Working with ConfiguRAD
•
Working with RADview Lite
Working with Terminal
You can connect an ASCII terminal directly to the Egate-100 control port.
Any standard ASCII terminal, dumb terminal, or a PC running a terminal emulation
application equipped with a V.24/RS-232 communication interface can be used to
set up and configure Egate-100.
³
To connect Egate-100 to a control terminal:
1. Make sure that all Egate-100 cables and connectors are properly connected.
2. Connect Egate-100 to a PC equipped with an ASCII terminal emulation
application such as HyperTerminal or Procomm.
3. Connect an ASCII terminal to the CONTROL port on the front panel. The
default settings are as follows:
ƒ
Baud Rate: 115,200 bps
ƒ
Data Bits: 8
ƒ
Parity: None
ƒ
Stop Bits: 1
ƒ
Flow Control: None.
4. To optimize the view of the system menus, do the following:
ƒ
Set the terminal emulator to VT100.
ƒ
If you are using HyperTerminal, set the terminal mode to 132-column
mode.
5. Power up Egate-100.
When the unit has initialized and completed the self-test, a menu
appears displaying initialization and self-test results. When the self test
has been successfully completed, the RDY LED on the front panel turns
green.
To access the main menu, you have to log in first.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuration and Management Alternatives
3-5
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
Logging In
³
To log in:
1. While connected to the terminal, click <ESC> to access the login screen.
The following login screen appears:
User name
Password
su
>1234
Figure 3-2. Terminal Login Screen
2. Enter your user name (su, tech or user) and your password when prompted.
The factory-set password for all users is 1234.
3. If you enter an invalid password in three consecutive attempts, the system
becomes inaccessible for 15 minutes.
ASCII Screen Format
Egate-100
Sample Menu> Screen Path
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Number
List of numbers
String
Selectable
Submenu
Command
...
...
...
>
>
(1)
(1,3,5-7,9)
(String)
(Selectable Value)
Prompt>
Please select item <1 to 6>
Hot Keys
Esc-previous menu; !–main Menu; &-exit
--------------------------------------------------------------Scroll Message
Figure 3-3. Typical Sample Screen
Parameters that appear in menu screens are described in tables following the
screen images. A typical table contains the following three columns:
•
Parameter – specifies the parameters appearing on the screen, including
submenus, where applicable.
•
Description – describes each parameter’s function.
•
Possible Values – provides all the values possible for the parameter, or a
range of values, including the default value, where applicable.
Working with ConfiguRAD
ConfiguRAD is a Web-based remote access terminal management application,
embedded within Egate-100. It provides a user-friendly Web interface for
configuring, collecting statistics and monitoring the Egate-100 unit.
3-6
Configuration and Management Alternatives
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Requirements for Web-Based Management
³
•
Internet Explorer 6.0 and up, running on Windows™
•
Netscape Communicator 7.0 and up, running on Windows™, HPOV or Linux
•
Firefox 1.0.4 and up, running on Windows™
•
Mozilla 1.4.3 and up, running on Linux.
Before you start using a Web browser for remote management or monitoring:
•
Enable scripts.
•
Configure the firewall that might be installed on your PC to allow access to
the destination IP address.
•
Disable pop-up blocking software, such as Google Popup Blocker. You may
also have to configure spyware and adware protecting software to accept
traffic from/to the destination IP address.
•
To prevent configuration errors, you must flush the browser’s cache
whenever you return to the same screen.
Logging In
³
To log in from a Web browser:
1. Connect the Ethernet port to the LAN.
2. Verify that an IP address has been assigned to the relevant unit, using an
ASCII terminal.
3. Open the Web browser.
4. Disable any pop-up blocking software, such as Google Popup Blocker.
5. In the address field, type the IP address of Egate-100 and then click <Enter>.
The ConfiguRAD opening window appears.
6. Click LOGIN.
You are prompted for user name and the password.
7. Type your user name and password. The default user name for read/write
permission is su and the default password is 1234.
The ConfiguRAD Main menu appears.
Notes
• It is recommended to change default passwords to prevent unauthorized
access to the unit
• Egate-100 allows two management sessions to be active simultaneously: one
network session (Telnet, ConfiguRAD, RADview-Lite) and one ASCII terminal
session.
• If no user input is detected for 5 minutes during a ConfiguRAD session,
Egate-100 automatically disconnects from the management station.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuration and Management Alternatives
3-7
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
Navigating the ConfiguRAD Menus
ConfiguRAD is a Web-based remote access terminal management software. It
provides a user-friendly interface for configuring, collecting statistics and
performing diagnostic tests on the Egate-100 units. Menus and available options
are identical to the ones available using Telnet or an ASCII terminal.
The auxiliary management tools are at the left-hand bottom corner of the
ConfiguRAD window:
³
•
Status. Shows the number of users currently managing Egate-100
•
Trace. Opens an additional pane for system messages, progress indicators
such as ping, software and configuration file downloads, and alarms. It is
recommended to keep the trace pane open at all times.
•
Refresh All. Refreshes performance registers.
To choose an option:
1. Click a link in the ConfiguRAD screen to display the next menu.
2. Once the target screen appears, select a value from the dropdown list or type
it in a text field.
Working with RADview Lite
RADview Lite is a user-friendly and powerful SNMP-based element management
system (EMS), used for planning, provisioning, and managing heterogeneous
networks. RADview-Lite provides monitoring capabilities for RAD products and
networks using their built-in SNMP agents.
Configuration and diagnostic capabilities are available via a GUI-cut-through to
ConfiguRAD.
For additional information on RADview-Lite, contact your local distributor.
3.5
Overview of Menu Operations
Once you have logged in, navigate the Egate-100 menus to set and view
configuration parameters. Figure 3-4 illustrates the main categories available
from the main menu.
3-8
Overview of Menu Operations
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Main Menu
Inventory
Configuration
Monitoring
Diagnostics
Utilities
Figure 3-4. Main Menu Tree
Main Menu Paths
Figure 3-5 below illustrates the Egate-100 main menu. You access all system
configuration and control functions from this menu.
The main menu options are:
•
Inventory – displays information on the functional blocks of the unit
•
Configuration – defines parameters for the Egate-100 system, physical layer
(SDH/SONET, GbE, Ethernet management port), bridge, and quality of service.
•
Monitoring – displays port connection status; a log file; active alarms;
Ethernet status and physical characteristics; bridge port statistics; and a MAC
table for running applications.
•
Diagnostics – initiates diagnostic tests – ping, E1/T1 PRBS, and display of
self-test results.
•
Utilities – manages transfer of updates to/from a remote server: upload of
software and download/upload of the configuration file.
Inventory
Click <1> to view system information, HW/SW versions, and HW
configuration
Configuration
Click <2> to set and configure all the parameters required to
operate Egate-100
Monitoring
Click <3> to monitor system status, performance, and statistics
Diagnostics
Click <4> to perform diagnostics
Utilities
Click <5> to upload or download application files, configuration
files, and backup files
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Overview of Menu Operations
3-9
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Main Menu
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inventory
Configuration
Monitoring
Diagnostics
Utilities
>
>
>
>
>
Please select item <1 to 5>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 3-5. Main Menu
Table 3-3. Main Menu Parameters
Parameter
Description
Possible Values /
Reference
Inventory
Displays the unit's hardware and software
versions, along with description of major
components.
Refer to Chapter 4
Configuration
Submenu providing access to the
configuration of the system; physical,
logical, and application level parameters.
Refer to Chapter 4
Monitoring
Submenu providing access to monitoring of
status, performance, and statistics.
Refer to Chapter 6
Diagnostics
Submenu providing access to diagnostics
and troubleshooting.
Refer to Chapter 6
Utilities
Submenu providing access to utilities such
as uploading /downloading configuration
files from a server, and resetting the
device.
Refer to Chapter 4
Principles of Navigation
The main menu categories lead to submenus and items with selectable
parameters. These items are listed and explained in Chapter 4 and Chapter 6.
All terminal screens are titled “Egate-100”, while the current screen’s name and
path are underlined as illustrated in Figure 3-5.
At any given screen, you may return to the main menu by typing <!>.
Hot Keys
Table 3-4 summarizes the functionality of hot keys that are available in the
different menu screens.
3-10
Overview of Menu Operations
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Table 3-4. Hot Keys
Hot Key
Functionality
P/p
Previous menu page (for long menus that exceed a page).
Scrolling up for menu items
N/n
Next menu page (for long menus that exceed a page). Scrolling
down for menu items
F/f
Forward (next entry) – stay in same menu with next instance
(Port) on axis Y
B/b
Backward (previous entry) – stay in same menu with previous
instance (Port) on axis Y
CTRL F/f
Forward (next entry) – stay in same menu with next instance
(Interval) on axis X
CTRL B/b
Backward (previous entry) – stay in same menu with previous
instance (Interval) on axis X
CTRL G/g
Refresh tables such as the MAC Address and the Event log
tables.
A,a
Add (new entry) and display its parameters in menu items
R,r
Remove entry that has its parameters displayed in menu items
G, g
Get (entry), Go
Skip left (move to the previous cell)
Skip right (move to the next cell)
Skip down (move to the down cell)
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
CTRL R/r
Scroll right
CTRL L/l
Scroll left
CTRL D/d
Scroll down
CTRL U/u
Scroll up
?
Display table help (if available)
TAB
Select next changeable cell (skip read-only cells)
G,g
Select specified cell – row_num, col_num
A,a
Add table entry
R,r
Remove table entry
C,c
Clear all table entries
M,m
Display selected table entry as a menu
S,s
Save table session changes
DEL
Clear currently typed string
Overview of Menu Operations
3-11
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
Hot Key
Functionality
ESC
Previous menu
!
Go to main menu
&
Exit from the menus; if user presses any key, LOGIN is displayed
@
Spread the messages scrolling area to full screen
$
Display history
#
Display previous command
+
Command filter start
-
Note
Parameter start
Save is essential for saving and applying configuration changes.
Menu Maps
Use these menu trees as a reference aid while performing configuration and
control functions. Chapter 4 illustrates menus and explains parameters. Table 3-2
lists default values.
Figure 3-6. Main Menu
Figure 3-7. Main Menu> Configuration
3-12
Overview of Menu Operations
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 3-8. Configuration > System
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Chapter 3 Operation
Figure 3-9. Configuration > System > Management
Overview of Menu Operations
3-13
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 3-10. Configuration > Physical Layer
Figure 3-11. Configuration > Logical Layer
3-14
Overview of Menu Operations
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Operation
Figure 3-12. Configuration > Applications
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Overview of Menu Operations
3-15
Chapter 3 Operation
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 3-13. Monitoring, Diagnostics, Utilities
3.6
³
To turn off the unit:
•
3-16
Turning Off the Unit
Remove the power cord from the power source.
Turning Off the Unit
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Chapter 4
Configuration
This chapter explains the Egate-100 configuration, utility, and inventory menus
and provides guidance on the parameter options. Although examples are given
from a terminal screen, the information is relevant for Telnet and ConfiguRAD as
well, as their menus are the same as those of the terminal.
The following three Main Menu options are presented in this chapter:
•
Inventory. Displays information on the functional blocks of the unit. For
additional information, refer to Section 4.3.
•
Configuration. Defines parameters for management and operation of
Egate-100. For additional information, refer to Sections 4.1 and 4.2.
•
Utilities. Manages transfer of software updates from a remote server: upload
of software and download/upload of the configuration file. For additional
information, refer to Section 4.3.
For the menu tree of Egate-100 management software, refer to Chapter 3. For
monitoring and diagnostics menus, including the configuration of alarms, refer to
Chapter 6.
A Quick Setup menu, illustrated in Figure 4-1, is available for users who are
already familiar with Egate-100. This menu includes mandatory configuration
settings such as host IP settings, frame type, and VLAN mode. For an overview of
these settings, refer to the Quick Start Guide at the beginning of this manual.
Detailed explanations of parameters are available in the relevant sections of this
chapter.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Quick Setup
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Management
Frame Type
VLAN Mode
Network Setting
User Setting
>
> (SONET)
> (Aware)
>
>
>
Please select item <1 to 5>
S-Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-1. Quick Setup Menu
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Management
4-1
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
4.1
Configuring Egate-100 for Management
Configuring Egate-100 for management includes configuring host parameters,
defining network managers, specifying user access and terminal parameters, and
providing device information.
The Egate-100 management platforms allow you to set system parameters as
listed below and illustrated in Figure 4-2.
•
Configure the management environment, including the following:
ƒ
Assigning a name and give a description for the device, and entering
information regarding device location and a contact person
ƒ
Defining host IP parameters
ƒ
Defining network management stations
ƒ
Configuring management access
ƒ
Controlling user access.
•
Specify the terminal data rate.
•
Mask or unmask the system alarms.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Clock Source
Management
Control Port
Alarms
Date and Time
Protection
Factory Default
Buffer Management
Syslog
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
Please select item <1 to 8>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-2. System Menu
Defining Host Parameters
Egate-100 can be managed using a network management station connected to
the Gigabit Ethernet network. In order to establish a proper connection, it is
necessary to configure the following: Host IP address, subnet mask, default
gateway, its trap, read and write communities.
³
To define the host IP parameters:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > System > Management, and then
select Host.
4-2
Configuring Egate-100 for Management
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
The Host menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-3.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Management> Host
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
IP Address
IP Mask
Default Gateway
Read Community
Write Community
Trap Community
Encapsulation
...
...
...
...
...
...
>
(0.0.0.0)
(0.0.0.0)
(0.0.0.0)
(public)
()
()
Please select item <1 to 7>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-3. Host Menu
2. Set the IP parameters according to Table 4-1:
ƒ
Select IP Address to define Egate-100’s IP address.
ƒ
Select IP Mask to define Egate-100’s IP subnet mask.
ƒ
Select Default Gateway and specify the default gateway server’s
IP address associated with the subnet to which Egate-100 belongs.
Table 4-1. Host IP Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
IP Address
0.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255
Host IP address
The default is 0.0.0.0
IP Mask
0.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255
Host IP subnet mask
The default is 0.0.0.0
Default
Gateway
0.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255
Default gateway IP address: It should
belong to the host IP subnet.
The default is 0.0.0.0
Note
To assign an IP address the first time the unit is powered up, or after resetting
the unit to the factory default, you must connect an ASCII terminal to the
CONTROL interface and use HyperTerminal to access the Egate-100 menus.
To establish a management link, you have to specify the SNMP trap, read, and
write communities.
³
To define the Egate-100 communities:
•
In the Host menu (Figure 4-3), set the communities according to Table 4-2:
ƒ
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Select Read Community to enter the name of a community with read-only
authorization.
Configuring Egate-100 for Management
4-3
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
ƒ
ƒ
Select Write Community to enter the name of a community with
read/write authorization.
Select Trap Community to enter the name of a community to which
Egate-100 should send traps.
Table 4-2. Egate-100 Communities
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Read
Community
None (default)
public
private
Recommended value: public
Write
Community
None (default)
public
private
Recommended value: private
Trap
Community
None (default)
public
private
Recommended value: public
Configuring Host Encapsulation
Egate-100 allows you to create a dedicated management VLAN in order to
separate management traffic from the user data. In addition, via the
Management Access menu you can restrict the management traffic to the
network or user ports or allow inband management via any of the Egate-100
ports.
³
To configure the host encapsulation:
1. To define VLAN tagging, in the Host menu (Figure 4-3) select Encapsulation.
The Encapsulation menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-4.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Management> Host>
Encapsulation
1. Host Tagging
2. Host VLAN ID[1 - 4094]
3. Host Priority Tag[0 - 7]
>
(Tagged)
... (1)
... (0)
Please select item <1 to 3>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-4. Encapsulation Menu
2. From the Encapsulation menu, specify the following (according to Table 4-3):
4-4
ƒ
Select the Host Tagging mode: Tagged or Untagged.
ƒ
Select Host VLAN ID to specify the host VLAN ID (1–4094).
This parameter is displayed only when Host Tagging is set to Tagged.
Configuring Egate-100 for Management
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
ƒ
Chapter 4 Configuration
Select Host Priority Tag to specify the priority level for the host VLAN
(0–7). This parameter is displayed only when Host Tagging is set to
Tagged.
3. Select Save.
4. Return to the Host menu and select Save again.
Table 4-3. Host Encapsulation Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Host Tagging
Untagged (default)
Tagged
•
Untagged: The host transmits and receives only untagged
frames. In VLAN-Aware mode, the host bridge port must be
set to Stripping.
•
Tagged: The host transmits VLAN-tagged frames and receives
only frames tagged with the same VLAN ID as that of the
host.
Host VLAN ID
1-4094
The default is 1
Sets the VLAN ID of the packets sent by the host. This parameter
only shows when Host Tagging is set to Tagged.
Host Priority Tag
0–7
The default is 0
Quality of Service priority tag for packets sent by the host. This
parameter only shows when Host Tagging is set to Tagged.
Entering Device Information
The Egate-100 management software allows you to assign a name to the unit,
and specify its location to distinguish it from the other devices installed in your
organization. A contact person can also be assigned. Each of these fields can
hold up to 50 characters.
³
To enter device information:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > System >Management > Device
Information
The Device Information menu appears displaying the hardware and
software versions in use as illustrated in Figure 4-5.
2. From the Device Info menu, select Name and enter a name for the Egate-100
unit. The default name is Egate-100.
3. Select Location, and enter a description of the Egate-100’s current location.
4. Select Contact Person, and enter the name of a contact person for this unit.
5. Select Serial Number, and enter a unique identification number corresponding
to the vendor-specific serial number.
6. Select Save.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Management
4-5
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Configuration> System> Management> Device Information
1.
2.
3.
4.
Description
Name
Location
Contact
Serial Number
...
...
...
...
...
(Egate-100 HW Ver:0.10/A, SW Ver:2.60)
(Egate-100)
(The location of this device)
(Name of contact person)
<>
Please select item <1 to 4>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-5. Device Information Menu
Controlling Management Access
You can configure the management access from the management access menu.
You can configure access for Telnet, SNMP and Web access as explained below.
³
To access the Management Access menu:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > System > Management, and then
select Management Access.
The Management Access menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-6.
Egate-100
Configuration> System> Management> Management Access
1. Telnet
2. SNMP
3. WEB
>
Please select item <1 to 3>
>
>
>
(Enable)
(Enable)
(Enable)
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-6. Management Access Menu
³
To configure Telnet access:
•
³
ƒ
Enable – All users are enabled.
ƒ
Enable Managers Only – Network managers listed in the manager list are
enabled.
ƒ
Secure – Users using an SSH connection are enabled.
ƒ
Secure Managers Only – Network managers listed in the manager list and
using an SSH connection are enabled.
ƒ
Disable – Telnet access is disabled.
To configure SNMP access:
•
4-6
Select Telnet and then choose as follows:
Select SNMP and then choose as follows:
Configuring Egate-100 for Management
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
³
Chapter 4 Configuration
ƒ
Enable – All users are enabled.
ƒ
Enable Managers Only – Network managers listed in the manager list are
enabled.
ƒ
Disable – SNMP access is disabled.
To configure Web access:
•
Select WEB and then choose as follows:
ƒ
Enable – All users are enabled.
ƒ
Enable Managers Only – Network managers listed in the manager list are
enabled.
ƒ
Secure – Users using an SSL connection are enabled.
ƒ
Secure Managers Only – Network managers listed in the manager list and
using an SSL connection are enabled.
ƒ
Disable – Web access is disabled.
Defining Access Policy
Access policy allows configuration of multiple authentication protocols. User
authentication is performed in the order the methods are selected. If the first
authentication method is not available or the user is not found, the next selected
method is used.
³
To define the access policy:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > System > Management, and then
select Access Policy.
The Access Policy menu appears.
2. Choose the desired option to configure the first level of authentication
(1st Level) as listed below:
ƒ
Local – Egate-100 uses the locally stored authentication database.
ƒ
Radius – Egate-100 uses the authentication database stored on the
Radius server.
2nd Level becomes available. If the user name is not found in the Radius
Server database or the password you enter does not match the user
name, the authentication fails.
3. Choose the desired option to configure the second level of authentication
(2nd Level) as listed below:
Note
ƒ
None – Egate-100 is only accessible via the 1st level.
ƒ
Local – Egate-100 uses the locally stored authentication database.
Special rules apply to su (superuser). If su does not exist in the Radius server
database or the system loses the connection to the Radius server, Egate-100
uses the local authentication database to authenticate the user if the 2nd level is
set to local.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Management
4-7
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Configuring User Access
Users with different access levels can access Egate-100 to make configuration
changes.
There are three access levels:
•
su. Read and write access including administrator privileges that include
adding and removing of other users as well as changing passwords for other
users.
•
tech. Read and limited write access. The password of this user can be
changed by this user.
•
user. Read-only access. This user allows you to view and only modify basic
parameters. You are able to change the password for this user.
The system ships with one default user for each access level. These users cannot
be removed. In addition, up to 16 more users can be added. These users can be
assigned to any of the access levels.
³
To view current users:
•
Navigate to Configuration > Control Port > Terminal Access, and then select
User Information.
The User Information menu appears.
Configuration> System> Control Port> Terminal Access> User
Information
User Name
Bob
Shiela
su
tech
user
...
... Access Level
SU
SU
SU
TECH
USER
Permanent users cannot be removed
A-Add; R-Remove; Clear
ESC-Previous menu; !-Main menu; &-Exit
Type
Dynamic
Dynamic
Permanent
Permanent
Permanent
?-help
Figure 4-7. User Information Menu
Note
³
If you are logged on as user or with a user name associated with user privileges,
Changing Password appears instead of Terminal Access in the menu.
To add a user:
1. In the User Information menu, type A.
You are prompted to assign a user name and a password and assign this
user to an access level as illustrated in Figure 4-8.
4-8
Configuring Egate-100 for Management
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Configuration> System> Control Port> Terminal Access> User
Information
1. User Name
2. Password
3. Access Level
...(-)
...(****)
> (-)
Permanent users cannot be removed
S-Save
ESC-Previous menu; !-Main menu; &-Exit
Figure 4-8. Add User Menu
2. After you specify the user name and password and assign an access level,
type S.
The new user is saved in the system.
³
To remove a user:
1. Select the desired user and type R.
You are asked to confirm or reject your selection.
2. Type Y or N to confirm or reject the selection.
³
To remove all users:
1. In the User Information menu, type C.
You are asked to confirm or reject your selection.
2. Type Y or N to confirm or reject the request.
If confirmed, all added users are removed. The default users remain in the
system.
Note
If you are logged on as user or with a user name associated with user privileges,
you are unable to add or remove users.
Egate-100 allows you to change the password for both the read-only user and
the super user. In case you forget your user password, you can obtain a new one.
³
To change a password
•
³
Refer to Configuring User for instructions.
To obtain a new password:
1. Log in with the username CHNGPASS.
An ID number (Dynamic Key) appears at the bottom of the menu.
2. Contact RAD Technical Support and refer to this key.
You will receive a temporary password.
3. Log in using the temporary password.
You will be prompted to enter and confirm a new password for future
sessions.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Management
4-9
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Configuring Network Managers
You can define or modify the network management stations to which the Egate100 SNMP agent sends traps. Up to 16 managers can be defined. In addition, you
can temporarily prevent a manager station from receiving traps by masking the
network manager.
³
To add a network manager:
1. From the Management menu, select Manager List.
The Manager List menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-9.
2. Enter a sequential number, corresponding to the manager you wish to
specify.
3. Specify IP Address and Trap (masked/unmasked).
³
To edit the manager list:
1. From the Management menu, select Manager List.
The Manager List menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-9.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Management> Manager List
Num
IP address
1
0.0.0.0
2
0.0.0.0
|
3
0.0.0.0
v
4
0.0.0.0
5
0.0.0.0
6
0.0.0.0
7
0.0.0.0
8
0.0.0.0
9
0.0.0.0
10
0.0.0.0
11
0.0.0.0
12
0.0.0.0
13
0.0.0.0
14
0.0.0.0
15
0.0.0.0
16
0.0.0.0
1. Change cell
Trap
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
... (0.0.0.0)
Please select item <1 to 1>
C - Clear
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
Figure 4-9. Manager List Menu
2. From the Manager List menu, move the cursor to the Manager IP cell you wish
to change by clicking <Tab>.
The selected cell is highlighted and the value is displayed in the Change
Cell field.
4-10
Configuring Egate-100 for Management
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
3. Select Change Cell, and enter a new IP address for the selected network
manager.
4. Move the cursor to the Trap field and toggle between Mask and Unmask to
mask or unmask traps for the selected management station.
Configuring Radius Server Parameters
Egate-100 supports connectivity to up to four Radius authentication servers.
³
To configure Radius server parameters:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > System > Management, and then
select Radius Parameters.
The Radius Server menu appears.
2. Specify the following parameters according to Table 4-4:
ƒ
Server Access – Enable or Disable
ƒ
Server IP Address – The Radius server’s IP address
ƒ
Key String – Free text to identify the server
ƒ
Number of Retries and Timeout – Access-attempt parameters
ƒ
Authentication Port – Port used for authentication.
3. To switch to additional Radius servers, type F or B respectively.
Egate-100
Configuration>System>Management>Radius Parameters
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Server Sequence Number
Server Status
Server Access
Server IP Address
Key String
Number of Retries[0 - 10]
Timeout (in seconds)[1 - 5]
Authentication Port[1 - 65535]
(1)
> (NOT_CONNECTED)
(Disable)
... (0.0.0.0)
... ()
... (2)
... (2)
... (1812)
Please select item <1 to 6>
F - Forward; B - Backward
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-10. Radius Parameters
Table 4-4. Radius Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Server Sequence
Number
1-4
The default is 1
Sequential Radius server number
Server Status
CONNECTED
NOT_CONNECTED (default)
Radius server connection status
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Management
4-11
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Server Access
Disable (default)
Enable
Enable or disable access to the Radius server
Server IP Address
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
The default is 0.0.0.0
IP address of the Radius server
Key String
User name (case sensitive)
User ID on the server
Number of Retries
1-10
The default is 2
Max. number of access attempts
Timeout
1-5
The default is 2
Number of seconds before access attempt fails
Authentication Port
1-65535
The default is 1812
Authentication protocol port
Configuring Terminal Parameters
Egate-100 allows you to configure the terminal data rate.
Note
³
The Baud Rate parameter is masked during a Telnet or Web-based session, as it is
only relevant when using the terminal to access Egate-100.
To change the terminal data rate:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > System > Control Port.
The Control Port menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-11.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Control Port
1. Baud Rate
2. Terminal Access
>
>
(115200 bps)
Please select item <1 to 1>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-11. Control Port Menu
2. From the Control Port menu, select Baud Rate.
The Baud Rate menu appears.
3. Select the desired data rate as listed in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5. Terminal Parameters
4-12
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Baud Rate
9600 bps
19200 bps
38400 bps
57600 bps
115200 bps (default)
Communication speed
Configuring Egate-100 for Management
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
4.2
Chapter 4 Configuration
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
To configure Egate-100 for operation, follow the steps below.
1. Define device-level parameters such as master and fallback clock source, link
protection, buffer-management thresholds, and syslog parameters
2. Configure the physical layer (SDH/SONET and Gigabit Ethernet ports)
3. Configure the logical ports
4. Configure the internal bridge
5. Configure bridge port parameters
6. Configure QoS parameters.
You have to define Egate-100 at every step, as many of the parameters do not
have default settings. If a parameter is not correctly defined, an error message
appears.
Setting Device-Level Parameters
Configuring the Clock Source
Note
The clock source is available for configuration only if the unit is equipped with a
T3 interface. In a unit with STM-1/OC-3 interfaces, the clock is set to the Rx clock
of the SDH/SONET link. If the link fails, the clock is set to the internal clock until
the link recovers.
Egate-100 has a master system clock, and a fallback clock that goes into action in
case the master clock fails (e.g. when the link supplying the timing fails).
The master and fallback clock sources can be the Rx clock of the T3 active link, or
the internal clock of the Egate-100 unit. It is recommended to have different
settings for the master clock and fallback clock: for example, Rx Clock for the
master clock and Internal for the fallback clock.
In the event that both Master and Fallback clocks (set to Rx) fail, the system clock
is automatically set to Internal.
³
To select the Clock Source:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > System > Clock Source
The Clock Source menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-12.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Clock Source
1. Master Clock
2. Fallback Clock
>
>
Please select item <1 to 2>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-12. Clock Source Menu
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-13
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
2. From the Clock Source menu, select Master Clock.
The Master Clock menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-13.
Egate-100
…Configuration> System> Clock Source> Master Clock
1. Source
2. Wait to Restore (sec)
3. Port Number [1 - 3]
>
...
>
(Rx Clock)
(300)
(1)
Please select item <1 to 2>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-13. Master Clock Menu (SDH/SONET)
Egate-100
…Configuration> System> Clock Source> Master Clock
1. Source
>
(Rx Clock)
2. Wait to Restore(sec)[0 - 720] ... (300)
3. Port Number [1 - 3]
... (2)
>
Please select item <1 to 3>
S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-14. Master Clock Menu (T3)
3. Choose one of the following to indicate the first-priority source of timing for
the Egate-100:
ƒ
Rx Clock. If you want the master clock source to be the Rx clock from the
T3 active link. This is the default value
ƒ
Internal. If you want the master clock to be the internal clock of the
Egate-100 unit.
4. If you choose Rx Clock, enter a Wait to Restore value: the number of seconds
(between 0 and 720) to wait before an attempt for the Master clock to be
restored.
5. For Rx Clock, specify the port number to be used.
6. Select Save.
7. From the Clock Source menu, select Fallback Clock.
The Fallback Clock menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-15.
4-14
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Clock Source> Fallback Clock
1. Source
>
(Internal)
Please select item <1 to 2>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-15. Fallback Clock Menu (SDH/SONET)
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Clock Source> Fallback Clock
1. Source
>
(Internal)
2. Wait to Restore (sec)[0 - 720]... (300)
3. Port Number [1 - 3]
... (2)
Please select item <1 to 3>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-16. Fallback Clock Menu (T3)
8. Choose one of the following, to indicate the second-priority source of timing:
ƒ
Internal. If you want the fallback clock to be the internal clock of the
Egate-100 unit.
ƒ
Rx Clock. If you want to set the fallback clock as the Rx clock from the T3
active link. This is the default value.
9. If you choose Rx Clock, enter a Wait to Restore value, ranging between 0 and
720 seconds.
10. For Rx Clock, specify the port number to be used.
11. Select Save.
Note
It is not recommended to set both the Master and the Fallback clock sources to
the same Rx clock.
Configuring Protection
Egate-100 supports the following backup (protection) options to ensure
continued operation in case of link failure, available in the Protection menu (see
Figure 4-17):
•
APS in 1+1 optimized bidirectional or uni-directional mode (for SDH/SONET
links)
•
Gigabit Ethernet redundancy according to 803.2ad.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-15
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Protection>
1. APS
2. Ethernet Aggregation
>
>
>
Please select item <1 to 2>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-17. Protection Menu
³
To configure APS:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > System > Protection.
The Protection menu appears.
2. From the Protection menu, choose APS.
The APS menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-18.
3. Enable Protection. To do so, select Protection, and then select Yes.
Additional parameters appear as illustrated in Figure 4-18.
4. Configure APS parameters according to Table 4-6.
5. Select Save.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Protection> APS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Protection
> (Yes)
Mode
> (1+1 optim. bidirectional)
Working Port
> (1)
Wait to Restore (sec)[1-720]...(300)
Command
> (No Command)
Flip upon SD
> (No)
>
Please select item <1 to 6>
S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-18. APS Configuration Menu
Table 4-6. APS Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Protection
Yes
No (default)
Activate or deactivate APS protection
Mode
1+1 optimized bidirectional (default)
Uni-directional
APS mode
Working Port
1 (default)
2
Port to receive data.
Wait to Restore
1 – 720
Number of seconds after link recovery
4-16
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
(sec)
The default is 300
before the next protection switch is
possible.
Command
Clear
Lockout of Protection
Force Switch
•
Clear. Removes the previous command.
•
Lockout of Protection. Prevents possible
APS switching.
•
Force Switch. Moves the active link to
the next port. This option is available for
1+1 Bi-Optimized Bidirectional only.
•
No Command. This is the default until a
command is selected.
Flip upon SD
Whether the two ports flip in the event of
signal degradation.
Yes
No (default)
³
To enable Gigabit Ethernet redundancy according to IEEE 802.3ad:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > System > Protection.
The Protection menu appears.
2. From the Protection menu, choose Ethernet Aggregation, and then choose
Enable.
The second Gigabit Ethernet port is ready to take over if the currently
used one fails.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Protection> Ethernet
Aggregation
1. Aggregation
> (Disable)
>
Please select item <1 to 1>
S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-19. Ethernet Aggregation Menu
Note
Gigabit Ethernet aggregation requires both Gigabit Ethernet ports be set to the
same speed and to Full Duplex, with autonegotiation enabled. Both Gigabit
Ethernet ports must have identical bridge port parameters (ingress filtering mode,
port VID, etc.) and be members of the same VLAN.
Configuring the Frame Buffers
Buffers are used to hold frames in the event of a burst of traffic. Egate-100’s
management software allows you to customize Egress drop thresholds (maximum
burst supported) for individual logical port queues – each of four priority levels –
and for the total of all logical-port queues of each priority level. Drop thresholds
can also be specified for the Gigabit Ethernet and Host ports. See Chapter 1 for
additional information.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-17
Chapter 4 Configuration
³
Installation and Operation Manual
To configure buffer management:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > System > Buffer Management
The Buffer Management menu appears (see Figure 4-20).
2. From the Buffer Management menu, select a logical port priority level (for
example, Traffic Class 1 Max) and specify the maximum number of buffers
allowed for each logical port queue at this Quality of Service priority level.
3. Repeat the previous step for any additional priority levels you wish to
customize at the individual queue level (Max).
4. From the Buffer Management menu, select a logical port priority level (for
example, Traffic Class 1 Total) and specify the total maximum number of
buffers for all logical port queues at this Quality of Service priority level.
5. Repeat the previous step for any additional priority levels you wish to
customize at the queue group level (Total).
6. Select GbE Max to change the maximum number of buffers for the Gigabit
Ethernet ports.
7. Select HOST Max to change the maximum number of buffers for host
management.
³
To reset buffer management parameters:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > System > Buffer Management
The Buffer Management menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-20.
2. From the Buffer Management menu, select Set to Default.
The default configuration is restored.
Egate-100
Configuration> System> Buffer Management
1. Traffic Class 0 Max [1 2. Traffic Class 1 Max [1 3. Traffic Class 2 Max [1 4. Traffic Class 3 Max [1 5. Traffic Class 0 Total [1
6. Traffic Class 1 Total [1
7. Traffic Class 2 Total [1
8. Traffic Class 3 Total [1
9. GbE Max [1 - 2500]
10. ETH 1 Max[1 - 2500]
11. HOST Max[1 - 2500]
12. Set To Default
>
Please select item <1 to 12>
2500]
2500]
2500]
2500]
- 2500]
- 2500]
- 2500]
- 2500]
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
(100)
(100)
(100)
(100)
(600)
(600)
(600)
(2500)
(50)
(100)
(100)
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-20. Buffer Management Menu
4-18
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Table 4-7 Buffer Management Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Traffic Class 0 Max
1–2500
Maximum burst supported for a bridge port
priority queue of traffic class 0 (lowest
priority)
The default is 100
Traffic Class 1 Max
1–2500
The default is 100
Traffic Class 2 Max
1–2500
The default is 100
Traffic Class 3 Max
1–2500
The default is 100
Traffic Class 0 Total
1–2500
The default is 600
Traffic Class 1 Total
1–2500
The default is 600
Traffic Class 2 Total
1–2500
The default is 600
Traffic Class 3 Total
1–2500
The default is 2500
GbE Max Buffers
1–2500
The default is 50
ETH 1Max Buffers
HOST Max Buffers
1–2500
Maximum burst supported for a bridge port
priority queue of traffic class 1
Maximum burst supported for a bridge port
priority queue of traffic class 2
Maximum burst supported for a bridge port
priority queue of traffic class 3 (highest
priority)
Total burst supported for all bridge port
priority queues of traffic class 0 (lowest
priority)
Total burst supported for all bridge port
priority queues of traffic class 1
Total burst supported for all bridge port
priority queues of traffic class 2
Total burst supported for all bridge port
priority queues of traffic class 3 (highest
priority)
Maximum burst supported for Gigabit
Ethernet port
The default is 100
Maximum burst supported for Fast
Ethernet port
1–2500
Maximum burst supported for Host port
The default is 100
Set to Default
Restores the default buffer mangement
configuration.
Configuring the Syslog Parameters
Syslog enables you to forward log messages via UDP over the network to a
receiving device, referred to as server from this point on.
³
To configure the syslog parameters:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > System > Syslog
The Syslog menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-21.
2. Specify the server’s and the transmitting device’s UDP ports and the server’s
IP address, and then click <Enter>.
3. Select Save.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-19
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Syslog
Logging Status
>
<Disable>
1. Server IP Address
...
<0.0.0.0>
2. Server UDP Port
...
<514>
3. Device UDP Port
...
<514>
4. Facility
>
<Local 1>
5. Severity Level
>
<Minor>
Please select item <1 to 5>
Figure 4-21. Syslog Menu
Table 4-8. Syslog Menu
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Logging Status
Displays whether logging is
enabled or disabled.
This value is read-only.
Server IP Address
IP address of the device
that receives the sytem log.
Server UDP Port
UDP Port of the device that
receives the sytem log.
Device UDP Port
UDP Port of the device that
transmits the sytem log.
Facility
Local 1 (default) - Local 7
Severity Level
Critical
Major
Minor (default)
Warning
Event
Info
Debug
Specify the level of log
messages up to which you
want to transmit them.
Setting Physical Layer Parameters
Egate-100 has SDH/SONET or Channelized T3 ports, depending upon installation
option, as well as Gigabit Ethernet ports. The SDH/SONET, T3, and Gigabit
Ethernet configuration menus are accessed from the Physical Layer menu.
If you need to make a change to the configuration of SDH/SONET or T3 physical
ports, you must first clear any mapping of these ports to the logical ports. The
Egate-100 device provides a read-only mapping table that describes the
SDH/SONET tributary mapping to physical E1/T1 ports (see Figure 4-29 and
Figure 4-30).
Configuring the SDH/SONET Ports
³
To configure SDH/SONET ports:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Physical Layer.
4-20
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
The Physical Layer menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-22.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer
1. Ethernet
2. SDH/SONET
>
>
Please select item <1 to 2>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-22. Physical Layer Menu (SDH/SONET)
2. From the Physical Layer menu, select SDH/SONET.
The SDH/SONET menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-23.
3. Configure the SDH/SONET Frame Type and Tx Clock. Refer to Table 4-9 for
additional information.
4. Configure Administrative Status & Alarms as explained on page 4-22.
5. Configure E1/T1 parameters as explained on page 4-22.
6. Configure SOH parameters as explained on page 4-24.
7. Configure HVC parameters as explained on page 4-24.
8. Configure LVC parameters as explained on page 4-25.
Egate-100
Configuration> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Frame Type
Tx Clock
Administrative Status & Alarms
Mapping
E1/T1
SOH
HVC
LVC
>
>
>
[]
>
>
>
>
(SDH)
(Loopback Timing)
>
Please select item <1 to 8>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-23. SDH/SONET Menu
Table 4-9. SDH/SONET Port Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Frame Type
SONET
SDH (default)
The Egate-100 mode of operation: E1s o SDH or
T1s o SONET.
Tx Clock
Internal
Loopback Timing (default)
Transmit clock source of the SDH/SONET port.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-21
Chapter 4 Configuration
³
Installation and Operation Manual
To configure SDH/SONET administrative status and alarms:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Physical Layer >SDH/SONET >
Administrative Status & Alarms.
The Administrative Status & Alarms menu appears as illustrated in
Figure 4-24.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET>
Administrative Status & Alarms
1. Port Number
>
(1)
2. Administrative Status
>
(Up)
3. Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 3>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-24. Administrative Status & Alarms Menu
2. Select Port Number, and then select the desired port number.
3. Select Administrative Status, and then select Up or Down to enable or disable
the SDH/SONET link respectively.
4. Select Alarms and specify whether to display (unmask) or to not display
(mask) them.
Note
³
When the SDH/SONET Administrative Status is set to Down, the SYNC indicator
(LED) is turned off.
To configure SDH/SONET E1/T1:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Physical Layer >SDH/SONET > E1/T1.
The E1/T1 menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-25.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> E1/T1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Port Number [1-63]
Administrative Status
Frame Type
Idle Code [0-ff]
Alarms
...
>
>
...
>
(5-12)
(Up)
(Unframed)
(0)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 5>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-25. SDH/SONET STM-1 E1/T1 Menu
4-22
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
2. Select an individual E1/T1 Port Number or a range of ports. You can map up
to 63 E1s or 84 T1s (in case of E1 over VC12 or T1 over VT1.5).
ƒ
To move to the next port, type F.
To move to the previous port, type B.
3. Configure parameters for E1 according to Table 4-10 or T1 according to
Table 4-11 respectively.
Table 4-10. SDH/SONET E1/T1 Parameters (E1)
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Port Number
1-63
Parameters can be specified for an
individual or range of ports.
Administrative
Status
Up (default)
Down
User-controlled activation of the port.
E1 Frame Type
Unframed (default)
Framed-CRC4
Framed-NoCRC4
Specifies the framing mode, including
for Ethernet o fractional E1, if E1 is
defined as framed.
E1 Idle Code
0-FF
For E1 Framed only
The default is 0
E1 Alarms
Masked
Unmasked (default)
Table 4-11. SDH/SONET E1/T1 Parameters (T1)
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Port Number
1-84
Parameters can be specified for an
individual or range of ports.
Administrative
Status
Up (default)
Down
User-controlled activation of the port.
T1 Frame Type
Unframed (default)
Framed-ESF
Framed-D4
Specifies framing mode, including for
Ethernet o fractional T1, if T1 is
defined as framed.
T1 Alarms
Masked
Unmasked (default)
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-23
Chapter 4 Configuration
³
Installation and Operation Manual
To configure SDH/SONET SOH:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Physical Layer >SDH/SONET > SOH.
The SOH menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-26.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> SOH
1. Port Number
2. Alarms
... (1)
>
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 2>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-26. SDH/SONET SOH Menu
2. Configure SOH parameters according to Table 4-12.
Table 4-12. SDH/SONET SOH Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Port Number
1–4 for dual card,
1–2 for 155/622
Alarms
Masked
Unmasked (defaul)
Section and Line Overhead alarms, per
port.
For each port, or range of ports,
select the port number and specify
whether to mask or unmask alarms.
³
To configure SDH/SONET HVC:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Physical Layer >SDH/SONET > HVC.
The HVC menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-27.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> HVC
1. Port Number
2. Payload Label [0 – ff]
3. Alarms
... (1)
... (02)
>
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 2>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-27. SDH/SONET HVC Menu
2. Configure HVC parameters according to Table 4-12.
4-24
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Table 4-13. SDH/SONET HVC Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Port Number
1–2
Payload Label
00 – FF
Defines the payload label to
attach to packets
Alarms
Masked
Unmasked (default)
High VC level alarms.
For SDH: per port
For SONET: Per VC3 per port
For each port, or range of
ports, select the port number
and specify whether to mask or
unmask alarms.
³
To configure SDH/SONET LVC:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Physical Layer >SDH/SONET > LVC.
The LVC menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-28.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> LVC
1. LVC Number [1-63]
2. Payload Label
3. Alarms
... (1)
... (Asynchronous)
>
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 2>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-28. SDH/SONET LVC Menu
2. Configure LVC parameters according to Table 4-14.
Table 4-14. SDH/SONET LVC Parameters
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
LVC Number
1–2
Payload Label
Unequipped
Equipped
Asynchronous
Bit Synchronous
Byte Synchronous
Extended Signal Label
Test Label
VC—AIS
Defines the payload label for packets
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-25
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Alarms
Masked
Unmasked (default)
Low VC level, per VC12 or VT1.5 link.
Range of links can be set.
For VC12: 1-63; For VT1.5: 1-84
For each port, or range of ports,
select the port number and specify
whether to mask or unmask alarms.
³
To view SDH/SONET Mapping:
•
Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Physical Layer >SDH/SONET >
Mapping.
The SDH/SONET Mapping menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-29 and
Figure 4-30 for SDH and SONET respectively. It shows the mapping
between the E1/T1 ports and the STM channels.
Egate-100
Configuration> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> Mapping (SDH)
TUG3
TU2
22
25
28
31
34
37
40
1
TU3
43
46
49
52
55
58
61
TUG3
TU2
23
26
29
32
35
38
41
2
TU3
44
47
50
53
56
59
62
TU1
TU1
TUG2-1 1
2
TUG2-2 4
5
TUG2-3 7
8
TUG2-4 10
11
TUG2-5 13
14
TUG2-6 16
17
TUG2-7 19
20
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
TU1
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
TUG3
TU2
24
27
30
33
36
39
42
3
TU3
45
48
51
54
57
60
63
Figure 4-29. SDH Mapping
Egate-100
Configuration> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> Mapping (SONET)
STS1
TU2
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
TU3
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
STS1
TU2
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
2
TU3
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
TU1
TU4
TU1
TUG2-1 1
22
29
TUG2-2 2
23
30
TUG2-3 3
24
31
TUG2-4 4
25
32
TUG2-5 5
26
33
TUG2-6 6
27
34
TUG2-7 7
28
35
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
TU4
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
STS1 3
TU1 TU2
57
64
58
65
59
66
60
67
61
68
62
69
63
70
TU3
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
TU4
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
Figure 4-30. SONET Mapping
4-26
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Configuring the Channelized T3 Ports
³
To configure channelized T3 ports:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Physical Layer.
The Physical Layer menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-31.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer
1. T3
2. Ethernet
>
>
Please select item <1 to 2>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-31. Physical Layer Menu (T3)
2. From the Physical Layer menu, select T3.
The T3 menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-23.
3. Specify the number of the port you wish to configure.
4. Configure T3 parameters according to Table 4-9.
5. Configure T1 channels according to Table 4-16.
6. Repeat this procedure for the additional T3 ports as relevant.
Egate-100
Configuration> Physical Layer> T3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Port Number [1 - n]
Administrative Status
Transmit Clock Source
Line type
Line length
Alarms
T1
... (1)
>
(Up)
>
(Internal)
>
(M23)
>
(Short)
>
(Unmasked)
>
>
Please select item <1 to 7>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-32. T3 Port Menu
Table 4-15. T3 Port Parameters
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Port Number
1-3
Number of the T3 port to be configured
Administrative
Status
Up (default)
Down
User-controlled activation of the T3 port
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-27
Chapter 4 Configuration
³
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Transmit Clock
Source
Loopback Timing
Internal (default)
Transmit clock source of the T3 port
Line Type
M13
M23 (default)
C-Bit
T3 frame type
Line Length
Short (default)
Long
T3 line length:
Short – Up to 255 feet (77.7 meters)
Long – Up to 255 feet (77.7 meters)
Alarms
Masked
Unmasked (default)
T1
Submenu
Refer to Figure 4-33
To configure individual T1 port parameters:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Physical Layer > T3 > T1.
The T1 menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-33.
Egate-100
Configuration> Physical Layer> T3> T1
1. Port Number[1 - 28]
... (1)
2. Administrative Status
>
(Up)
3. Frame Type
>
(Unframed)
4. Idle code[0 – ff]
...(5)
5. Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
>
Please select item <1 to 4>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-33. Individual T1 Menu
2. Configure the T1 channel according to Table 4-16.
Table 4-16. Individual T1 Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Port Number
1 – 84, depending
on selected T3 port
Number of the T1 port to be configured. Each
T3 port corresponds to 28 T1 ports, e.g. if the
first T3 port has been selected then only T1
ports 1 – 28 can be configured
Administrative
Status
Up (default)
Down
User-controlled activation of the T1 port
Frame Type
Unframed (default)
D4
ESF
T1 frame type
Idle Code
0 - ff
Idle code
This parameter is available for framed T1 only.
4-28
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Alarms
Chapter 4 Configuration
Masked
Unmasked (default)
Configuring the Ethernet Ports
Egate-100 provides two Gigabit Ethernet ports. You can use the second port as a
backup to ensure that the unit continues operating if the first port fails. For
instructions on enabling Gigabit Ethernet redundancy, refer to Configuring
Protection. The device also contains a Fast Ethernet management port.
³
To configure the Ethernet ports:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Physical Layer > Ethernet.
The Ethernet menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-34.
2. Under Port, specify the desired Gigabit Ethernet link or the management
Ethernet port.
The relevant Ethernet port parameters appear.
3. Specify the Ethernet port parameters according to Table 4-17.
4. Select Save.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> Ethernet
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Port
Administrative Status
Auto Negotiation
Speed & Duplex
Alarms
>
>
>
>
>
(GbE-1)
(Enabled)
(Disabled)
(100BaseT Full Duplex)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 4>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-34. Ethernet Physical Port Menu – Autonegotiation Disabled
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> Ethernet
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Port
Administrative Status
Auto Negotiation
Max. Capability Advertised
Alarms
>
>
>
>
>
(GbE-1)
(Enabled)
(Enabled)
(1000BaseT Full Duplex)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 4>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-35. Gigabit Ethernet Physical Port Menu – Autonegotiation Enabled
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-29
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 4-17. Gigabit Ethernet Port Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Port
GbE-1 (default)
GbE-2
ETH MNG
Choose the desired Ethernet port
Auto Negotiation
Enabled
Disabled
Enabling autonegotiation allows for
automatic determination of the speed
and duplex mode.
For 1000BaseT, autonegotiation is
mandatory and enabled by default.
Autonegotiation is also mandatory for
Gigabit Ethernet redundancy.
Speed & Duplex
10 Mbps Half Duplex
10 Mbps Full Duplex
100 Mbps Half Duplex
100 Mbps Full Duplex
Appears if Auto Negotiation is disabled:
Ethernet Max
Capability
Advertised
10 Mbps Half Duplex
10 Mbps Full Duplex
100 Mbps Half Duplex
100 Mbps Full Duplex
1000 Mbps Full Duplex
Appears if Auto Negotiation is enabled
and the Port is not ETH MNG:
Alarms
Masked
Unmasked (default)
Mask Gigabit Ethernet alarms.
The speed can be 10/100BaseT at full
duplex or half duplex.
For Gigabit Ethernet redundancy, both
links must be set to the same speed and
to Full Duplex.
Define the maximum speed and duplex
mode. The system will not exceed the
speed you specified even if the ports
were able to negotiate a faster speed.
Configuring Logical Layer Parameters
Logical port configuration includes the definition of the protocol for each physical
E1/T1 port. After a logical port is defined, it is bound to a bridge port, and bridge
port properties are configured.
Logical ports can be used to define one or more of the following:
4-30
•
Ethernet over HDLC over E1/T1
•
PPP/BCP (PPP over HDLC)
•
Ethernet over MLPPP over n x E1/T1
•
GFP (non-LCAS mode). You can configure whether Egate-100 expects GFP
frames to have VCAT headers, to enable interoperability with devices that do
not support G.8040, such as MiRIC.
•
GFP (LCAS mode)
•
Virtual Concatenation Group (VCG).
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
In order to define an MLPPP (multi-link PPP) logical port, you must first define a
set of PPP logical ports over E1/T1, and then attach (bind) up to eight such PPP
logical ports to the MLPPP port. The MLPPP port is then bound to a bridge port.
In order to define a GFP (LCAS mode) port, you must first define a VCG logical
port over E1/T1, and then attach (bind) the VCG logical port to the GFP port. The
GFP port is then bound to a bridge port.
In order to change or delete any logical ports, you must first erase any
associations with a bridge port.
³
To configure the logical ports:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration.
The Configuration menu appears.
2. From the Configuration menu, select Logical Layer.
The Logical Layer menu (E1 or T1) appears as illustrated in Figure 4-36
through Figure 4-42, according to the selected protocol type.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Logical Layer
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Port Number[1 - 126]
Port Name
Protocol Type
Physical Port Number[1 - 63]
Alarms
...
...
>
...
>
(5)
(Central)
(HDLC)
(5)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 5>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-36. Logical Layer Menu – HDLC (E1)
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Logical Layer
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Port Number[1 - 126]
Port Name
Protocol Type
Physical Port Number[1 - 63]
Address & Control Compression
Protocol Field Compression
Alarms
...
...
>
...
>
>
>
(1)
(Logical Port 1)
(PPPoHDLC)
(1)
(On)
(On)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 7>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-37. Logical Layer Menu – PPP over HDLC (E1)
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-31
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer
1. Port Number[1 - 126]
...
2. Port Name
...
3. Protocol Type
>
4. Physical Port Number[1 - 84] ...
5. Active Timeslots
>
6. Alarms
>
>
Please select item <1 to 6>
F - Forward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
(3)
(Logical Port 3)
(PPPoHDLC)
(1)
(1-24)
(Unmasked)
Figure 4-38. Logical Layer Menu – PPP over HDLC (T1)
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer
1. Port Number[1 - 126]
... (85)
2. Port Name
... (Logical Port 85)
3. Protocol Type
>
(MLPPP)
4. Bind Logical Ports
>
(1-8)
5. MTU(bytes)
>
(0)
6. Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
>
Please select item <1 to 6>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-39. Logical Layer Menu – MLPPP
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer
1. Port Number [1 - 126]
... (65)
2. Port Name
... (Logical Port 65)
3. Protocol Type
>
(GFP)
4. Multi Link
>...(No)
5. Physical Port Number [1 - 63] ... (1)
6. Payload FCS
>
(Disable)
7. VCAT header
>
(Enable)
8. Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
>
Please select item <1 to 8>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-40. Logical Layer Menu – GFP, non-LCAS mode
4-32
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer
1. Port Number[1 - 126]
... (48)
2. Port Name
... (Logical Port 48)
3. Protocol Type
>
(GFP)
4. Multi Link
>...(Yes)
5. Bind Logical Port
>
(47)
6. Payload FCS
>
(Disable)
7. Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
>
Please select item <1 to 7>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-41. Logical Layer Menu – GFP, LCAS mode
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer
1. Port Number [1 - 126]
2. Port Name
3. Protocol Type
4. Bind Physical Ports
5. Edit Bind Physical List
6. Wait to Restore (sec) [0 - 720]
7. Hold Off (msec) [0 - 1000]
8. Alarms
>
Please select item <1 to 9>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
...
...
>
...
>
>
>
>
(75)
(Logical Port 75)
(VCG)
(1)
(Disable)
(Enable)
(Unmasked)
Figure 4-42. Logical Layer Menu – VCG
3. In the Logical Layer menu, configure the parameters according to Table 4-18.
4. Select Save to finish the logical layer port configuration.
³
To configure the physical port list for VCG protocol type:
1. In the Logical Layer menu, select Edit Bind Physical List.
The Edit Bind Physical List menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-43. It
displays the physical port(s) associated with the logical port, and allows
you to add or delete ports.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-33
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer> Edit Bind Physical List
Physical Port List of VCG
1. Add physical port to VCG
2. Delete physical port from VCG
>
Please select item <1 to 8>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
...
...
>
1
(-)
(-)
Figure 4-43. Edit Bind Physical List Menu for VCG
2. To add a physical port to the VCG, select Add physical port to VCG.
3. To remove a physical port, select Delete physical port from VCG.
Table 4-18 Logical Port Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Port Number
1 - 126
Logical port number
Port Name
String of up to 20
characters
Descriptive name for the logical port
Default:
Logical Port [port #]
Protocol Type
HDLC (default)
PPP o HDLC
MLPPP
GFP
VCG
Traffic protocol type:
PPP o HDLC for multiple E1/T1;
MLPPP (up to eight of type PPP for each MLPPP);
GFP (LCAS or non-LCAS mode)
VCG
Physical Port Number
1 - 63 (E1)
1 - 84 (T1)
For non- MLPPP: Number of the physical port to which
the logical port is mapped.
Address and Control
Compression
On
Off
For PPP over HDLC: Specifies whether address and
control compression is on or off.
Protocol field
compression
On
Off
For PPP over HDLC: Specifies whether protocol field
Active Timeslots
None (default)
1 - 31 or list (E1)
1 - 24 or list (T1)
For non-GFP, if selected physical port is framed: The
fractional E1 or T1 active timeslots that carry
traffic regarding the logical port.
Bind Logical Ports
1 - 8 or list
For MLPPP: Numbers of the PPPoHDLC logical ports
comprising the MLPPP bundle.
MTU(bytes)
0 (default)
64,
128
256
512
1024
For MLPPP: Maximum Transmission Unit, in bytes, to
allow fragmentation for low reassembly delay. Selecting
0 means that there is no fragmentation.
4-34
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
compression is on or off.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Multi Link
No
Yes
For GFP: Specifies LCAS mode
No: non-LCAS
Yes: LCAS.
Bind Logical Port
1 - 8 or list
For GFP (LCAS): Port number of VCG logical port to attach
to the GFP port.
Payload FCS
Disable
Enable
For GFP: Specifies whether Payload FCS is enabled or
disabled. If you want to minimize bandwidth, it is
recommended to not use this option as the original
CRC32 of the Ethernet packet is transferred when the
packet is encapsulated into GFP.
VCAT Header
Disable
Enable
For GFP (non-LCAS): Specifies whether VCAT header is
expected in frames.
Disable – Egate-100 eliminates the VCAT header from
transmitted frames and does not expect VCAT header in
received frames.
Enable - Egate-100 adds VCAT header to transmitted
frames and expects VCAT header in received frames
Bind Physical Ports
1 - 28 or list
Edit Bind Physical List
For VCG: Numbers of the physical ports comprising the
virtual concatenation group.
For VCG: Opens submenu to edit list of physical ports
comprising the virtual concatenation group. This is
available after the logical port is saved for the first time.
Wait To Restore
0 - 720
For VCG: Specifies how long Egate-100 does not change
its settings after it detects that an error no longer exists
Hold Off
0 - 1000
For VCG: Specifies how long long Egate-100 does not
change its settings after it detects an error. After this
timeout, Egate-100 checks for the error, and if it still
exists then it changes its settings
Alarms
Unmasked (default)
Masked
Specifies if alarms are unmasked or masked
Configuring the Bridge
The configuration of the Egate-100 internal bridge involves setting global
parameters for the bridge (VLAN-Aware/Unaware, aging, VLAN identification, and
VLAN loop detection) and assigning and configuring bridge ports. Configuration of
the bridge is performed via the Application menu.
In order to change a bridge from VLAN-aware to VLAN-unaware (or from
VLAN-unaware to VLAN-aware), you have to first remove any defined bridge
ports. After changing the bridge mode, you have to reset the device.
For a detailed explanation of Egate-100’s bridge, refer to Chapter 1. For
information on configuration parameters, refer to Table 4-19.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-35
Chapter 4 Configuration
³
Installation and Operation Manual
To configure the internal bridge:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Application > Bridge.
The Bridge menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-44.
2. From the Bridge menu, configure the parameters as specified in Table 4-19.
3. If you set the bridge to VLAN-aware mode, define VLAN Membership as
described in Configuring VLAN Membership.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Application> Bridge
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
VLAN Mode
>
Aging Time (Sec)[30 - 10000]
...
Split Horizon
>
Vlan Ethertype (HEX)
...
Loop Detection
...
Vlan Loop Detection [1 - 4094] ...
Static MAC Table
[]
Remote Terminal
Bridge Port for Remote Terminal
Bridge Ports
>
VLAN Membership
>
(Aware)
(300)
(Disabled)
(8100)
(Enable)
(1)
>
(Enable)
(100)
Please select item <1 to 10>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-44. Bridge Menu
Table 4-19 Bridge Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
VLAN Mode
Unaware (default)
Aware
•
Aware. Forwarding is based on VLAN and
MAC address. The bride operates
according to 802.1Q. If enabled, VLAN
Membership becomes available.
•
Unaware. Forwarding is based on the MAC
address only. The bridge operates
according to 802.1D.
Aging Time
30–10000 seconds
The default is 300
4-36
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
For dynamic table entries. If the aging time
elapses and no frame has been received with
this MAC, the entry is erased from the table.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Split Horizon
Disable (default)
Enable
Based VLAN
•
Prevents switching packets between
bridge ports bound to logical ports.
•
If the VLAN mode is set to VLAN Aware
and Split Horizon is set to Based VLAN,
you have to to enable or disable Split
Horizon for each VLAN separately.
This prevents frames tagged with a VLAN
ID from being switched between the
bridge ports that are members of this
VLAN.
To enable or disable Split Horizon for a
specific VLAN, navigate to Bridge Port in
the VLAN Membership menu.
Vlan Ethertype
Any HEX value
The default is 8100
Egate-100 uses the Ethertype value to
identify and tag VLAN tagged frames.
Loop Detection
Disable (default)
Enable
Specifies whether loop detection is enabled
for the bridge. For loop detection message to
be sent, you must enable loop detection on a
bridge port.
Vlan Loop
Detection
1–4094
Specifies the VLAN ID of the loop-detection
frame
This parameter appears in the menu only if
Loop Detection is enabled.
Refer to Configuring the MAC Table.
Static MAC Table
Remote
Terminal
Disable (default)
Enable
Enables viewing the terminal of the remote
device
This parameter appears only if OAM is
enabled on a bridge port and the discovery
process has completed
Bridge Port for
Remote
Terminal
1–130
Specifies the bridge port to user for the
remote termnial
This parameter appears only if Remote
Terminal is enabled
Bridge Ports
Refer to Configuring the Bridge Ports.
VLAN
Membership
•
Refer to Configuring VLAN Membership.
•
This parameter becomes available if the
VLAN mode is VLAN Aware.
Configuring the MAC Table
Static MAC addresses are stored in the MAC table. The column for VLAN ID
appears in a VLAN-aware bridge only.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-37
Chapter 4 Configuration
³
Installation and Operation Manual
To add a static MAC address:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Application > Bridge, and then
select Static MAC Table.
The Static MAC Table appears as illustrated in Figure 4-45.
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> Bridge> Static MAC Table
VLAN ID
MAC Address
1
1
11-11-11-11-11-11
|
2
2
22-22-22-22-22-22
v
3
3
33-33-33-33-33-33
4
4
44-44-44-44-44-44
5
5
55-55-55-55-55-55
1. MAC address … (11-11-11-11-11-11)
Receive Bridge Port
1
2
3
4
5
S/s – Save ; A/a – Add entry
ESC-prev menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
Figure 4-45. Static MAC Table
2. In the Static MAC Table, type A.
The Static MAC Table switches to the Add mode as illustrated in
Figure 4-46.
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> Bridge> Static MAC Table
1. VLAN Number
2. MAC Address
3. Received Bridge Port
> ()
> (0.0.0.0)
> ()
Please select item <1 to 3>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-46. Static MAC Table, Add Menu (Aware Bridge)
3. In Add mode, configure the MAC Table parameters according to Table 4-20:
Table 4-20 MAC Table Parameters.
4-38
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
VLAN Number
1-4094
VLAN of the traffic for this table entry
This parameter can be set in VLAN-Aware
mode only.
MAC Address
Default: 00 00 00 00 00
MAC address from which traffic is
received.
Received
Bridge Port
2-128
Number of the bridge port used for
traffic of this table entry.
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
³
Chapter 4 Configuration
To remove a static address from the table:
•
From the Static MAC Table (Figure 4-45), select a row containing a MAC
address that you want to remove and type R.
The MAC address is deleted from the table.
³
To clear the MAC table:
1. In the Static MAC Table (Figure 4-45), type C.
Egate-100 displays the following message: Are you sure (Y/N)?
2. Type Y to confirm deletion of all MAC addresses from the table.
Configuring the Bridge Ports
A bridge port can be bound to a Gigabit Ethernet port, the Fast Ethernet
management port, or a logical port (including an MLPPP or GFP (LCAS) port), as
well as the Host port. Bridge Port 1 is always bound to the Host port.
³
To configure the bridge ports:
1. From the Bridge menu, select Bridge Ports.
The Bridge Port menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-47.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Application> Bridge> Bridge Ports
1. Port Number [1 - 130]
2. Port Name
3. Bind to
4. Logical Port Number [1 - 144]
5. Administrative Status
6. Ingress Filtering
7. Accept Frame Types
8. Port VID [1 - 4094]
9. Default Priority Tag[0 - 7]
10. Replace Priority
11. Egress Tag Handling
12. Ingress Tag Handling
13. Loop Detection
14. Maximum MAC Address[1 - 64000]
15. Link OAM(802.3ah)
... (3)
... (Bridge Port 3)
>
(Logical Port)
... (1)
>
(Up)
>
(Enable)
>
(Tag Only)
... (1)
... (0)
>
(No)
>
(None)
>
(None)
>
(Enable)
>...(64000)
>...(Disabled)
Please select item <1 to 16>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-47. Bridge Port Configuration Menu
In the Bridge Ports menu, configure the Bridge Port parameters according to
Table 4-21. The settings pertain to the port to which you bound the bridge port
previously.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-39
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
2. To navigate through the defined bridge ports, type F or B to move one port
forward or backward respectively.
3. To remove the current bridge port, type R.
4. Select Save.
Table 4-21. Bridge Port Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Bind to
Host
1GbE-1 or 1GbE-2
ETH MNG
Logical Port
Specifies the physical or logical port to
which the bridge port is bound.
Logical Port Number
1-126
The logical port number. This parameter
appears only if binding to a logical port.
Port Number
1-130
The bridge port number.
1 is reserved for the host bridge port.
Port Name
Alphanumeric string
The name of the bridge port.
Administrative
Status
Up (default)
Down
None
Specifies if this port is part of the
bridge or not.
Ingress Filtering
Enable
Disable (default)
•
Enabled: The device discards
incoming frames for VLANs which do
not include this port in its member
set.
•
Disabled: The port accepts all
incoming frames.
Appears in a VLAN-Aware bridge only.
Accept Frame Types
All (default)
Tag Only
•
Tag Only specifies that the device
discards untagged frames at ingress.
•
All specifies that untagged frames
received on this port are accepted
and assigned to the PVID for this
port.
Appears in a VLAN-Aware bridge only.
1-4094
Port VID
The default is 2
This is the PVID, the VLAN ID assigned
to untagged frames received on this
port. If stacking is enabled, this is the
tag that is added.
Appears in VLAN-Aware bridge only.
Default priority tag
0-7
The default is 0
4-40
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
Priority of the VLAN asigned to
untagged frames. It can also be used to
replace the incoming VLAN priority, or in
Stacking mode,
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Replace Priority
Yes
No (default)
•
Yes: The default priority tag is set
instead of the incoming VLAN frame
value.
•
This parameter is valid only if Ingress
Tag Handling is set to None.
•
Stripping: Removes the first VLAN
tag from every transmitted frame,
on the egress of the port (pop).
•
Stacking: Adds the PVID and default
priority to every transmitted frame
on the egress of the port (push).
Egress Tag Handling
Stripping
Stacking
None (default)
Appears in VLAN-aware bridge only.
Stripping
Stacking
None (default)
Ingress Tag
Handling
•
Stripping: Removes the first VLAN
tag from every frame received on
the ingress of the port (pop).
•
Stacking: Adds the PVID to every
frame received on the ingress of the
port (push).
•
None: Adds PVID only to untagged
frames received at the port’s
ingress.
This parameter is only available with
VLAN-aware bridge, and does not
appear when the logical port is bound
to the Gigabit Ethernet port.
Disable
Enable (default)
Loop Detection
•
When enabled, and if Vlan Loop
Detection for the bridge is not 0, a
loop-detection message is sent.
•
When disabled, no loop detection
message is sent.
This parameter is only available for
bridge ports bound to logical ports.
Maximum MAC
Address
1–64000
The default is 64000
Maximum number of MAC addresses
that can be learned from this port.
Link OAM (802.3ah)
Disable (default)
Enable
Specifies OAM link operation for the
bridge port
Configuring VLAN Membership
³
To configure VLAN Membership (VLAN-aware bridge only):
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Application > Bridge > VLAN
Membership.
The VLAN Membership menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-48.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-41
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
2. Select VLAN ID, and select a set of VLAN IDs.
3. Select Egress Transparent Ports, and select a set of bridge ports (E-Ports).
4. Select Save All.
5. In the VLAN Membership menu, select View VLAN ID to Bridge Ports or
View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID.
A table appears displaying the mapping of VLAN IDs to bridge ports, or
bridge ports to VLAN IDs as illustrated in Figure 4-49 and Figure 4-51
respectively. Type <Ctrl-U> and <Ctrl-D> to navigate up and down within
the tables if they exceed the screen length.
6. To open the menu associated with a selected VLAN ID or Egress Port,
navigate to the desired row and type M.
You can add a VLAN ID or Egress Port or delete the highlighted VLAN ID or
Egress Port.
7. In the menu for each VLAN ID selected in the View VLAN ID to Bridge Ports
menu, select E-Port and specify one or more Egress Ports to map to this
VLAN ID, or select Delete E-Port to remove the current mapping.
8. In the menu for each Egress Port selected in the View Bridge Port to VLAN IDs
menu, select VLAN ID and specify one or more VLAN IDs to map to this Egress
Port, or select Delete VLAN ID to remove the current mapping.
9. Click <ESC> to return to the View VLAN ID to Bridge Ports or the View Bridge
Ports to VLAN ID menu.
10. Click <ESC> to return to the VLAN Membership menu.
³
To clear VLAN Membership Mapping (VLAN-aware bridge only):
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Application > Bridge > VLAN
Membership.
The VLAN Membership menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-48.
2. To delete the configuration of all VLAN IDs, select View VLAN ID to Bridge
Ports, and then type C in the VLAN ID to close the Bridge Ports menu.
3. To delete the configuration of all Egress Ports, select View Bridge Ports to
VLAN ID, and then type C in the Bridge Port to close the VLAN ID menu.
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> Bridge> VLAN Membership
1.
2.
3.
4.
VLAN ID
Egress Transparent Ports
View VLAN ID to Bridge Port
View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
(1-5,10)
(2-3,6,8-9)
[]
[]
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-48. VLAN Membership Menu
4-42
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Egate-100
Configuration> Application > Bridge >VLAN Membership>
View VLAN ID to Bridge Ports
VLAN ID
3
100
Egress Transparent Ports
3,14
2
>
A-Add;R-Remove;C – Clear All
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
Figure 4-49. View VLAN ID to Bridge Ports
Egate-100
Configuration> Application > Bridge > VLAN Membership>
View VLAN ID to Bridge Ports
VLAN ID[1 - 4094]
1. E-Ports
... (-)
... (-)
>
A-Add;R-Remove;C – Clear All
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 4-50. Adding a VLAN ID
Egate-100
Configuration> Application > Bridge >VLAN Membership>
View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
E-Port
2
3
VLAN ID
3-7
3
>
A-Add;R-Remove;C – Clear All
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 4-51. View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-43
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Configuration> Application > Bridge> VLAN Membership>
View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
E-Port[1 - 128]
1. VLAN ID
2. Delete VLAN ID
... (2)
... (3-7)
... (-)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 4-52. VLAN Membership – Adding Egress Transparent Port
Configuring the Quality of Service
You can configure Egate-100’s QoS (Quality of Service) mapping at the bridge
level. Egate-100 supports three methods of traffic classification:
•
802.1 priority mapping (VLAN-aware bridge only)
•
DSCP priority mapping, using tag values
•
Priority mapping per IP precedence.
You specify the classification using the Priority Classification menu. For an
explanation of Quality of Service parameters, refer to Table 4-22.
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> QoS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Priority Classification
Priority Mapping
Unknown Unicast Priority
Multicast Priority
Broadcast Priority
>
>
>
>
>
(802.1p)
(Traffic Class 0)
(Traffic Class 0)
(Traffic Class 0)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-53. QoS Menu
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> QoS> Priority Classification
(None)
1. None
2. 802.1p
[VLAN-Aware only]
3. DSCP
4. IP Precedence
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-54. QoS Priority Classification Menu
³
To select a priority classification method:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Application > QoS > Priority
Classification.
4-44
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
The Priority Classification menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-54.
2. From the Priority Classification menu, select the desired traffic classification
method: 802.1p (VLAN-Aware mode only), DSCP, IP Precedence, or None.
3. Select Save to save the changes.
An option for the QoS Priority Mapping menu is added to the QoS menu,
as well as options for setting Unknown Unicast, Multicast and Broadcast
Priority. Refer to Figure 4-53.
Configuring QoS Priority Mapping
Egate-100 supports four different traffic queues. These traffic queues can be
assigned different priority levels, according to the level of service represented by
each queue, where Traffic Class 0 represents the lowest priority and Traffic
Class 3 the highest.
³
To assign priorities to traffic queues for 802.1p and IP Precedence:
1. Following the above procedure, select 802.1p or IP Precedence as the desired
traffic classification method.
2. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Application > QoS > Priority
Mapping.
The Priority Mapping menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-55.
3. From the Priority Mapping menu, select the desired priority level (Tag Value).
Eight priority levels are available, ranging from 0 to 7.
4. Enter the assigned traffic queue number (Traffic Class 0 – 3).
5. To assign a traffic queue to additional priorities, repeat this procedure for
each desired priority.
6. Select Save to save the changes.
³
To assign priorities to traffic queues for DSCP:
1. Following the above procedure, select DSCP as the desired traffic
classification method.
2. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Application > QoS > Priority
Mapping.
The Priority Mapping menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-56. The
menu lists only those values that differ from Traffic Class 0.
3. From the Priority Mapping menu, select the desired Tag Value (0 – 63) and
enter the assigned traffic queue number (Traffic Class 0 – 3).
4. To add a new entry, type A and enter the Tag Value and Traffic Class as
illustrated in Figure 4-57 and Figure 4-58.
5. To assign a traffic queue to additional tags, repeat this procedure for each
desired tag value.
Unassigned values are automatically mapped to the lowest priority queue
(Traffic Class 0).
6. Select Save.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-45
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 4-22. Quality of Service Parameters
Parameter
Possible Values
Remarks
Priority Classification
802.1
IP Precedence DSCP
None
Method by which to assign priority.
802.1 option is for VLAN-Aware bridge only.
Tag Value 0 Priority through Tag
Value 7 Priority
(for IP Precedence and 802.1p)
Traffic Class 0–3
Default: Traffic Class 0 for each Tag Value 0-7
Tag Value (for DSCP)
0-63
Default: Tag Value 0 displayed
Traffic Class (for DSCP)
Traffic Class 0–3
Default: Traffic Class 0 for each Tag Value 0-63
Unknown Unicast Priority
Traffic Class 0–3
Default: Traffic Class 0
Multicast Priority
Traffic Class 0–3
Default: Traffic Class 0
Broadcast Priority
Traffic Class 0–3
Default: Traffic Class 0
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> QoS> Priority Mapping
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Tag
Tag
Tag
Tag
Tag
Tag
Tag
Tag
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
(Traffic
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
1)
2)
1)
3)
3)
2)
1)
1)
>ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-55. QoS Priority Mapping Menu (802.1 and IP Precedence)
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> QoS> Priority Mapping
1. Tag Value[0 - 63]
2. Traffic Class
... (0)
>
(Traffic Class 0)
>
A - Add
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-56. QoS Priority Mapping Initial Menu (DSCP)
4-46
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Egate-100
Configuration> Application > QoS> Priority Mapping> Traffic Class
(Traffic Class 0)
1. Traffic Class 0
2. Traffic Class 1
3. Traffic Class 2
4. Traffic Class 3
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-57. QoS Priority - Traffic Classes (DSCP)
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> QoS> Priority Mapping
1. Tag Value[0 - 63]
2. Traffic Class
3. Save
... (2)
>
(Traffic Class 1)
>
A - Add
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-58. QoS Priority Mapping Menu (DSCP)
Configuring Unknown Unicast, Multicast, and Broadcast
Priorities
Egate-100 supports four different traffic queues, where the lowest priority is
represented by Traffic Class 0 and the highest priority by Traffic Class 3.
³
To assign priorities to traffic queues:
1. Following the above procedure, select the desired traffic classification
method (802.1p, DSCP, or IP Precedence).
2. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > Application > QoS > Unknown
Unicast Priority, Multicast Priority, or Broadcast Priority.
The appropriate priority menu appears.
3. Select the traffic queue number (Traffic Class 0 – 3).
4. Select Save.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuring Egate-100 for Operation
4-47
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
4.3
Additional Tasks
You can perform additional maintenance tasks that may be necessary or helpful
from time to time:
•
Viewing Inventory
•
Configuring Date and Time
•
Transferring Software and Configuration Files
•
Resetting Egate-100.
Viewing Inventory
The inventory displays description of the unit and its ports, its hardware and
software revision, and power supply type.
³
To display the Egate-100 inventory:
1. From the Main menu, select Inventory.
The Inventory table appears. Refer to Figure 4-59 for STM-1/OC-3 and
Figure 4-60 for T3 respectively.
2. In the Inventory table, use the arrow keys to navigate.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Inventory
Boot Version
SW Version
HW Version
INTERFACES
SDH/SONET link
SFP: Vendor:
SDH/SONET link
SFP: Vendor:
1Gbe link 1
1Gbe link 2
Power supply 1
Power supply 2
... (E1.01)
... (2.50E24)
... (0.00/A)
INFORMATION
1
... (155M 1310nm SM SH RJ45(SFP))
Infineon FO GmbH; Part No.: V23848-C18-C56; Rev: F1A8
2
... (155M 1310nm MM SH RJ45(SFP))
DELTA; Part No.: LCP-155A4HDM; Rev: 000
... (UTP (1000BaseT),RJ-45)
... (UTP (1000BaseT),RJ-45)
... (Module not installed)
... (Module not installed)
Figure 4-59. Inventory Menu ( STM-1/OC-3)
4-48
Additional Tasks
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
Egate-100
Main Menu> Inventory
Boot Version
SW Version
HW Version
Serial Number
...
...
...
...
INTERFACES INFORMATION
T3 link
...
1Gbe link 1
...
1Gbe link 2
...
Power supply 1
...
Power supply 2
...
(E1.01)
(2.50E25)
(0.00/A)
(ID 123456789)
(BNC)
(UTP (1000BaseT),RJ-45)
(UTP (1000BaseT),RJ-45)
(Module not installed)
(PS-DC)
Figure 4-60. Inventory Menu (T3)
Configuring Date and Time
³
To enter date and time information:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > System > Date and Time.
The Date and Time menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-61.
2. Select Date to update the date in the format illustrated.
3. Select Time to update the time in the format illustrated.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Date and Time
1. Date [YYYY-MM-DD]
2. Time [HH:MM:SS]
... (2005-03-31)
... (13:14:15)
Please select item <1 to 2>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-61. Date and Time Menu
Transferring Software and Configuration Files
This section presents procedures for installing new software releases in Egate100 and transferring configuration files.
Egate-100 stores two software versions, each of them in one of the two
partitions of its memory. The software is stored in compressed format. The main
(operational) version is uncompressed and loaded into the Egate-100 RAM upon
power-up. The second version is kept for backup purposes. If the operational
software becomes corrupted, you can swap it with the backup. Egate-100 is
delivered with main and backup software installed.
New software releases are distributed as *.img files, which are downloaded to
Egate-100. When starting a download, the current backup is erased and the new
software placed in the backup partition. When downloading is complete, the unit
checks the integrity of the new software file. If it is correct, then after reset of
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Additional Tasks
4-49
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
the unit by the user the new software release becomes active and the previously
active software becomes the backup. If a failure occurs during downloading, the
new version is erased. In this case, only one version is left in memory.
Software files can also be uploaded, for additional backup.
Configuration files can also be uploaded for storage and backup, and they can be
downloaded as well. Configuration files from older versions of Egate-100 can be
loaded.
The management software allows file transfer via TFTP or XMODEM. The software
files can also be downloaded to Egate-100 via Boot Manager, using TFTP or
XMODEM, as explained in Appendix B.
³
To delete the backup version:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Utilities > File Utilities > File System.
The File System menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-62.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Utilities> File Utilities> File System
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SW Files
SWAP SW Files
Delete Backup Version
Save Default Configuration File
Delete Default Configuration File
Please select item <1 to 5>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-62. File System Menu
2. Select Delete Backup Version.
You are prompted to confirm your choice.
³
Note
To swap files:
This option is only available if a backup of the software file is stored in the
backup partition.
1. Navigate to Main menu > Utilities > File Utilities > File System.
The File System menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-62.
2. Select SWAP SW Files.
You are prompted to confirm your choice.
3. Reset the unit in order to activate the backup version. For instructions on
resetting Egate-100, refer to Resetting Egate-100.
Saving/Deleting the Current Configuration as Default
You can save any current setting as the device default setting in order to replace
the original factory default settings, thus enabling Egate-100 to use these
settings when ‘resetting Egate-100 to the factory defaults.
4-50
Additional Tasks
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
If required, you can erase these settings completely and restore the factory
defaults.
³
To save the current configuration as the default configuration:
•
From the File System menu (Figure 4-62), select Save Default Configuration
File.
The current values of all configuration parameters are saved as the unit's
default values.
³
To delete the saved default configuration and restore the original factory default:
•
From the File System menu, select Delete Default Configuration File.
Transferring Software Files via TFTP or X-Modem
³
To transfer software files via TFTP:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Utilities > File Utilities > SW & File Transfer > TFTP.
The File Transfer menu appears.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Utilities> File Utilities> SW & File Transfer> TFTP
1.
2.
3.
4.
Server IP
Remote File Name
Total Timeout (sec) [1-1000]
Command
Transfer Status
Transfer Error
... (172.171.40.123)
... (e-gate.img)
... (60)
>
>
(No operation)
(No error)
Please select item <1 to 4>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-63. File Transfer Menu
2. Select Server IP, and enter IP address of TFTP server.
3. Select Remote File Name, and enter a file name as follows:
ƒ
When downloading, specify the name of the file to be downloaded to
Egate-100.
ƒ
When uploading, assign a name to the file that uploads to the remote
server.
4. Select Total Timeout, and specify a duration between 1 and 1,000 seconds
for file transfer timeout. In case of a failure in the download process, the
process will be reinitialized as long as this timeout period has not elapsed.
5. Select Save to save the changes.
If Host IP, Server IP and Remote File Name are specified, the Command
menu appears.
6. Select Command to start the desired procedure:
ƒ
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Upload. Save a configuration file on a remote server.
Additional Tasks
4-51
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
ƒ
Download. Transfer a software or configuration file to Egate-100.
The file transfer starts.
The file transfer process is logged using the system messages listed below:
•
Starting Upload
•
Starting Download
•
Upload Failed
•
Download Failed.
The system messages are stored in the event log file. For additional information
regarding the log file, refer to Chapter 6.
³
To transfer files via X-Modem:
1. Navigate to Main menu > Utilities > File Utilities > SW & File Transfer
> X-Modem.
The X-Modem menu appears.
2. Select Command.
The X-Modem Command menu appears as illustrated in Figure 4-64.
3. Select the required download or upload operations.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Utilities> File Utilities> SW & File Transfer> X-Modem>
Command
1. SW download to main
2. SW download to backup
3. Configuration file download
4. Configuration file upload
5. Log file upload
Please select item <1 to 6>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 4-64. X-Modem Command Menu
Resetting Egate-100
Egate-100 supports two types of reset:
•
Reset all parameters to their factory defaults
•
Restart the device.
Resetting to Factory Defaults
You can reset Egate-100 to its default configuration settings. For a complete list
of the configuration defaults, refer to Chapter 3.
³
To reset Egate-100 to the default settings:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > System > Factory Defaults.
Egate-100 displays the following message:
4-52
Additional Tasks
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 4 Configuration
The device parameters will be set to defaults. Unit must
be reset. Do you want to proceed? (Y/N)
2. Type Y to confirm your request.
Egate-100 restarts and resets all parameters to their default settings.
Note
If you have saved different default settings, Egate-100 returns to them and not
to the factory default settings.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Additional Tasks
4-53
Chapter 4 Configuration
Installation and Operation Manual
Resetting the Unit
When necessary, you can perform a normal reset of the unit. This restarts
Egate-100 without resetting it to factory defaults.
³
To reset Egate-100:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Utilities > Reset.
The following confirmation message appears:
The device will restart. Do you want to proceed? (Y/N).
2. Type Y to confirm your request.
Note
4-54
Resetting the unit does not affect configuration settings.
Additional Tasks
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Chapter 5
Configuring Typical
Applications
This chapter provides specific instructions for configuring Egate-100 for typical
applications.
5.1
Application with User and Management Traffic
Separated by VLAN
Figure 5-1 illustrates an application where Egate-100 supports three remote sites
using different user VLANs (CPEs using tag stacking) and an additional host VLAN
shared by the three CPEs for secured management traffic.
Figure 5-1. Egate-100 Application with VLANs, Management via Gigabit Ethernet Port
The following requirements exist for this application:
•
1000 BaseT/BaseSx connection to the Ethernet network where the ETX-202A
NTU is used for each VLAN
•
E1 links to the SDH/SONET network where RICi-E1/T1, RICi-8E1/T1, and
RICi-16E1/T1 are installed for each VLAN
•
Network management station for management.
Table 5-1 shows the framing type and protocol for the E1 channels, as well as
the logical ports and bridge ports used in the application. Table 5-2 shows the
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with User and Management Traffic Separated by VLAN
5-1
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
bridge port bindings and egress tag handling. The VLAN memberships are shown
in Table 5-3.
Table 5-1. E1 Port Specifications
Unit/Interface
E1 port
numbers
Framing type
Logical port
numbers
Protocol
Bridge port
number
RICi-E1/T1
11
CRC 4 enabled
11
GFP (non-LCAS)
101
RICi-8E1/T1
12 – 19
Unframed
12 – 19
PPPoHDLC
20
MLPPP, bound to
logical ports 12 – 19
21
VCG
22
GFP (LCAS), bound to
logical port 21
RICi-16E1/T1
20 – 35
CRC 4 enabled
102, bound to
MLPPP port
103, bound to GFP
port
Table 5-2. Bridge Port Specifications
Bridge port
number
Bind to
Egress tag
handling
1
Host (automatic)
Stripping
2
GbE-1
None
3
GbE-2
None
101
Logical port 11
None
102
Logical port 20
None
103
Logical port 22
None
Table 5-3. VLAN Memberships
VLAN
Bridge port members
100 (management)
1, 2, 3, 101, 102, 103
200 (RICi-E1/T1 user data)
2, 3, 101
300 (RICi-8E1/T1 user data)
2, 3, 102
400 (RICi-16E1/T1 user data)
2, 3, 103
The Egate-100 unit is initially configured via an ASCII terminal connection. The
configuration procedure is divided into four main stages:
1. Configuring system parameters (host IP, host tagging, network manager)
2. Configuring physical port parameters (Gigabit Ethernet, SDH/SONET, E1 ports)
3. Configuring the logical layer (logical ports for the E1 ports)
4. Configuring the bridge (configuring bridge to VLAN-aware, binding the bridge
ports to logical ports and Gigabit Ethernet ports, configuring VLAN
memberships).
5-2
Application with User and Management Traffic Separated by VLAN
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Procedures entailed for each of these stages are included below for E1/SDH.
Note
Procedures are almost identical for T1/SONET with the additional limitation that
T1s for MLPPP bundles must be framed, with 24 timeslots.
Refer to Chapter 4 for further details on the relevant configuration parameters.
Configuring System Parameters
Make sure that Egate-100 is properly installed and connected to an ASCII
terminal.
³
To configure the host parameters:
1. Display the Host menu (Configuration> System > Management> Host), and
configure the host parameters as illustrated in Figure 5-2.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Management> Host
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
IP Address
IP Mask
Default Gateway
Read Community
Write Community
Trap Community
Encapsulation
...
...
...
...
...
...
>
(192.188.10.10)
(255.255.255.0)
(192.188.10.1)
(public)
(private)
(public)
Please select item <1 to 7>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-2. Configuring Host Parameters
2. To define host VLAN tagging, in the Host menu select Encapsulation to
navigate to the Encapsulation menu.
3. Configure the host encapsulation parameters as illustrated in Figure 5-3.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Management> Host>
Encapsulation
1. Host Tagging
2. Host VLAN ID[1 - 4094]
3. Host Priority Tag[0 - 7]
>
(Tagged)
... (100)
... (0)
Please select item <1 to 3>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-3. Configuring Host Encapsulation
³
To add the network manager:
1. In the Manager List menu (Main Menu > Configuration > System >
Management > Manager List), move the cursor to the Manager IP cell you
wish to change by clicking <Tab>.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with User and Management Traffic Separated by VLAN
5-3
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
The selected cell is highlighted and the value is displayed in the Change
Cell field.
2. Select Change Cell, and enter 192.188.10.11 for the selected network
manager.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Management> Manager List
Num
IP address
1
192.188.10.11
2
0.0.0.0
|
3
0.0.0.0
v
4
0.0.0.0
5
0.0.0.0
6
0.0.0.0
7
0.0.0.0
8
0.0.0.0
9
0.0.0.0
10
0.0.0.0
11
0.0.0.0
12
0.0.0.0
13
0.0.0.0
14
0.0.0.0
15
0.0.0.0
16
0.0.0.0
1. Change cell
Trap
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
... (0.0.0.0)
Please select item <1 to 1>
C - Clear
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
Figure 5-4. Adding Network Manager
Configuring Ethernet Parameters
The Gigabit Ethernet ports must be configured for operation if the default values
are not suitable for the application.
³
To configure the Gigabit Ethernet interface:
•
Display the Ethernet Menu (Main Menu > Configuration > Physical Layer >
Ethernet), and configure the following for both Gigabit Ethernet links
according to your application requirements:
ƒ
Autonegotiation
ƒ
Max capability.
Configuring SDH/SONET Parameters
Configuring SDH/SONET Interface
The clock is provided by the SDH/SONET network, therefore you must configure
the SDH/SONET physical layer to use the timing from the SDH/SONET interface.
5-4
Application with User and Management Traffic Separated by VLAN
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
³
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
To configure the SDH/SONET interface timing:
•
Navigate to the SDH/SONET Physical Port menu (Main Menu > Configuration >
Physical Layer > SDH/SONET) and configure the parameter values as
illustrated in Figure 5-5.
Egate-100
Configuration> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Frame Type
Tx Clock
Administrative Status & Alarms
Mapping
E1/T1
SOH
HVC
LVC
>
>
>
[]
>
>
>
>
(SDH)
(Loopback Timing)
>
Please select item <1 to 8>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-5. SDH/SONET Menu
Configuring SDH/SONET E1 ports
You must configure the E1 ports with the appropriate frame type as specified in
Table 5-1. You must configure the following E1 ports:
•
For RICi-E1/T1: E1 port 11, framed (CRC 4 enabled)
•
For RICi-8E1/T1: E1 ports 12 – 19, unframed
•
For RICi-16E1/T1: E1 ports 20 – 35, framed (CRC 4 enabled).
The E1 port configuration is done in the SDH/SONET Physical Port E1 menu (Main
Menu > Configuration > Physical Layer > SDH/SONET).
³
To configure the E1 port for RICi-E1/T1:
•
In the SDH/SONET Physical Port E1 menu, configure E1 port 11 as illustrated
in Figure 5-6.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> E1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Port Number [1-63]
Administrative Status
Frame Type
Idle Code [0-ff]
Alarms
...
>
>
...
>
(11)
(Up)
(CRC-4 Enable)
(0)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 5>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-6. Configuring E1 Port for RICi-E1/T1
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with User and Management Traffic Separated by VLAN
5-5
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
³
Installation and Operation Manual
To configure the E1 ports for RICi-8E1/T1:
1. In the SDH/SONET Physical Port E1 menu, configure E1 port 12 as illustrated
in Figure 5-7.
2. Repeat the same configuration for E1 ports 13 to 19.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> E1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Port Number [1-63]
Administrative Status
Frame Type
Alarms
...
>
>
>
(12)
(Up)
(Unframed)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 4>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-7. Configuring E1 Ports for RICi-8E1/T1
³
To configure the E1 ports for RICi-16E1/T1:
1. In the SDH/SONET Physical Port E1 menu, configure E1 port 20 as illustrated
in Figure 5-8.
2. Repeat the same configuration for E1 ports 21 to 35.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> E1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Port Number [1-63]
Administrative Status
Frame Type
Idle Code [0-ff]
Alarms
...
>
>
...
>
(20)
(Up)
(CRC-4 Enable)
(0)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 5>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-8. Configuring E1 Ports for RICi-16E1/T1
Configuring Logical Layer Parameters
You must configure logical ports for the E1 ports, as specified in Table 5-1. You
must configure the following logical ports:
•
For RICi-E1/T1: Logical port 11, GFP (non-LCAS)
•
For RICi-8E1/T1: Logical ports 12 – 19 with PPP over HDLC, which are then
bound to logical port 20 with MLPPP protocol
•
For RICi-16E1/T1: Logical port 21 with VCG, which is then bound to logical
port 22 with GFP (LCAS) protocol.
The configuration of the logical ports is done in the Logical Layer menu (Main
Menu > Configuration > Logical Layer).
5-6
Application with User and Management Traffic Separated by VLAN
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
³
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
To configure the logical layer for the E1 port to RICi-E1/T1:
•
In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 11 with GFP protocol
(non-LCAS), to correspond to physical port 11, as illustrated in Figure 5-9.
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer
1. Port Number [1 - 126]
... (11)
2. Port Name
... (Logical Port 11)
3. Protocol Type
>
(GFP)
4. Multi Link
>...(No)
5. Physical Port Number [1 - 63] ... (11)
6. Payload FCS
>
(Disable)
7. VCAT header
>
(Enable)
8. Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
>
Please select item <1 to 8>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-9. Configuring Logical Port for RICi-E1/T1
³
To configure the logical layer for the E1 ports to RICi-8E1/T1:
1. In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 12 with PPP over HDLC
protocol, to correspond to physical port 12, as illustrated in Figure 5-10.
2. Repeat the same configuration for logical ports 13 to 19, to correspond to
physical ports 13 to 19.
3. In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 20 with MLPPP protocol,
binding it to logical ports 12 to 19, as illustrated in Figure 5-11.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Logical Layer
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Port Number[1 - 126]
Port Name
Protocol Type
Physical Port Number[1 - 63]
Address & Control Compression
Protocol Field Compression
Alarms
...
...
>
...
>
>
>
(12)
(Logical Port 12)
(PPPoHDLC)
(12)
(On)
(On)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 7>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-10. Configuring PPPoHDLC Logical Ports for RICi-8E1/T1
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with User and Management Traffic Separated by VLAN
5-7
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer
1. Port Number[1 - 126]
... (20)
2. Port Name
... (Logical Port 20)
3. Protocol Type
>
(MLPPP)
4. Bind Logical Ports
>
(12-19)
5. MTU(bytes)
>
(0)
6. Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
>
Please select item <1 to 6>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-11. Configuring MLPPP Logical Port for RICi-8E1/T1
³
To configure the logical layer for the E1 ports to RICi-16E1/T1:
1. In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 21 with VCG protocol, to
correspond to physical ports 20 to 35, as illustrated in Figure 5-12.
2. In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 22 with GFP protocol (LCAS),
binding it to logical port 21, as illustrated in Figure 5-13.
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer
1. Port Number [1 - 126]
2. Port Name
3. Protocol Type
4. Bind Physical Ports
5. Edit Bind Physical List
6. Wait to Restore (sec) [0 - 720]
7. Hold Off (msec) [0 - 1000]
8. Alarms
>
Please select item <1 to 8>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
...
...
>
...
>
>
>
>
(21)
(Logical Port 21)
(VCG)
(20 - 35)
(300)
(5)
(Unmasked)
Figure 5-12. Configuring Logical Port for RICi-16E1/T1 (VCG)
5-8
Application with User and Management Traffic Separated by VLAN
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer
1. Port Number[1 - 126]
... (22)
2. Port Name
... (Logical Port 22)
3. Protocol Type
>
(GFP)
4. Multi Link
>...(Yes)
5. Bind Logical Port
>
(21)
6. Payload FCS
>
(Disable)
7. Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
>
Please select item <1 to 7>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-13. Configuring Logical Port for RICi-16E1/T1 (GFP)
Configuring Bridge Parameters
The following steps must be performed:
1. Configuring the bridge to VLAN-aware
2. Configuring the bridge ports as specified in Table 5-2
3. Defining VLAN memberships as specified in Table 5-3.
Configuring the Bridge
The bridge must be configured to VLAN-aware, so that Egate-100 forwards traffic
based on VLAN as well as MAC address.
³
To configure the bridge parameters:
•
Navigate to the Bridge menu (Main Menu > Configuration > Applications >
Bridge) and configure the parameter values as illustrated in Figure 5-14.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Application> Bridge
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
VLAN Mode
Aging Time (Sec)[30 - 10000]
Split Horizon
Vlan Ethertype (HEX)
Loop Detection
Vlan Loop Detection [1 - 4094]
Static MAC Table
Remote Terminal
Bridge Ports
VLAN Membership
>
...
>
...
...
...
[]
(Aware)
(300)
(Disabled)
(8100)
(Enable)
(1)
>
(Disable)
>
>
Please select item <1 to 9>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-14. Configuring the Bridge
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with User and Management Traffic Separated by VLAN
5-9
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
Configuring the Bridge Ports
The bridge ports required for the application are shown in Table 5-2. The binding
of bridge port 1 to the host port is automatic in Egate-100, so does not have to
be configured. The bridge port bound to the host must perform egress tag
stripping because it handles management traffic that had the tag added to the
frame, therefore it must be stripped at egress. The Port VID can be left as the
default value, as user frames arrive tagged.
The configuration of the bridge ports is performed in the Bridge Port menu (Main
Menu > Configuration > Applications > Bridge > Bridge Ports).
³
To configure the bridge port for the host:
•
From the Bridge Port menu, configure the Egress Tag Handling for the host
bridge port to perform stripping, as illustrated in Figure 5-15.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Application> Bridge> Bridge Ports
1. Port Number [1 - 130]
2. Port Name
Bind to
3. Administrative Status
4. Ingress Filtering
5. Accept Frame Types
6. Port VID [1 - 4094]
7. Default Priority Tag[0 - 7]
8. Replace Priority
9. Egress Tag Handling
10. Ingress Tag Handling
... (1)
... (Bridge Port 1)
Host
>
(Up)
>
(Enable)
>
(Tag Only)
... (1)
... (0)
>
(No)
>
(Stripping)
>
(None)
Please select item <1 to 10>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-15. Configuring Bridge Port for Host
³
To configure the bridge port for the Gigabit Ethernet ports:
1. From the Bridge Port menu, configure the bridge port parameters for bridge
port 2, binding it to GbE-1, as illustrated in Figure 5-16.
2. Repeat the same configuration for bridge port 3, binding it to GbE-2.
5-10
Application with User and Management Traffic Separated by VLAN
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Application> Bridge> Bridge Ports
1. Port Number [1 - 130]
2. Port Name
3. Bind to
4. Administrative Status
5. Ingress Filtering
6. Accept Frame Types
7. Port VID [1 - 4094]
8. Default Priority Tag[0 - 7]
9. Replace Priority
10. Egress Tag Handling
11. Ingress Tag Handling
12. Maximum MAC Address[1 - 64000]
... (2)
... (Bridge Port 2)
(GbE-1)
>
(Up)
>
(Enable)
>
(Tag Only)
... (1)
... (0)
>
(No)
>
(None)
>
(None)
>...(64000)
Please select item <1 to 12>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-16. Configuring Bridge Port for Gigabit Ethernet Port
³
To configure the bridge ports for the logical ports:
1. From the Bridge Port menu, configure the bridge port parameters for bridge
port 101, binding it to logical port 11, as illustrated in Figure 5-17.
2. Repeat the same configuration for bridge ports 102 and 103, binding them to
logical ports 20 and 22 respectively.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Application> Bridge> Bridge Ports
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Port Number [1 - 130]
Port Name
Bind to
Logical Port Number [1 - 144]
Administrative Status
Ingress Filtering
Accept Frame Types
Port VID [1 - 4094]
Default Priority Tag[0 - 7]
Replace Priority
Egress Tag Handling
Ingress Tag Handling
Loop Detection
Link OAM(802.3ah)
Maximum MAC Address[1 - 64000]
... (101)
... (Bridge Port 101)
(Logical Port)
(11)
>
(Up)
>
(Enable)
>
(Tag Only)
... (1)
... (0)
>
(No)
>
(None)
>
(None)
>
(Enable)
>...(Disabled)
>...(64000)
Please select item <1 to 15>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-17. Configuring Bridge Port for E1 Ports
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with User and Management Traffic Separated by VLAN
5-11
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
Configuring the Bridge VLAN Memberships
You must configure the VLAN memberships as specified in Table 5-3. The
following VLANs are required:
ƒ
Management VLAN (100): Contains the host port, the bridge ports bound
to the E1 logical ports, and the bridge ports bound to the Gigabit
Ethernet ports.
ƒ
User VLAN for RICi-E1/T1 (200): Contains the bridge port bound to the
logical port for the E1 port to RICi-E1/T1, and the bridge ports bound to
the Gigabit Ethernet ports.
ƒ
User VLAN for RICi-8E1/T1 (300): Contains the bridge port bound to the
logical port for the E1 ports to RICi-8E1/T1, and the bridge ports bound
to the Gigabit Ethernet ports.
ƒ
User VLAN for RICi-16E1/T1 (400): Contains the bridge port bound to the
logical port for the E1 ports to RICi-16E1/T1, and the bridge ports bound
to the Gigabit Ethernet ports.
The configuration of the VLAN memberships is done in the VLAN Membership
menu (Main Menu > Configuration > Applications > Bridge > VLAN Membership).
³
To define the management VLAN memberships:
•
In the VLAN Membership menu, configure the parameters as illustrated in
Figure 5-18.
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> Bridge> VLAN Membership
1.
2.
3.
4.
VLAN ID
Egress Transparent Ports
View VLAN ID to Bridge Port
View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
(100)
(1-3,101-103)
[]
[]
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-18. Configuring Management VLAN Membership
³
To define the memberships for the user VLAN for RICi-E1/T1:
•
In the VLAN Membership menu, configure the parameters as illustrated in
Figure 5-19.
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> Bridge> VLAN Membership
1.
2.
3.
4.
VLAN ID
Egress Transparent Ports
View VLAN ID to Bridge Port
View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
(200)
(2-3,101)
[]
[]
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-19. Configuring User VLAN Membership (RICi-E1/T1)
5-12
Application with User and Management Traffic Separated by VLAN
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
³
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
To define the memberships for the user VLAN for RICi-8E1/T1:
•
In the VLAN Membership menu, configure the parameters as illustrated in
Figure 5-20.
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> Bridge> VLAN Membership
1.
2.
3.
4.
VLAN ID
Egress Transparent Ports
View VLAN ID to Bridge Port
View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
(300)
(2-3,102)
[]
[]
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-20. Configuring User VLAN Membership (RICi-8E1/T1)
³
To define the memberships for the user VLAN for RICi-16E1/T1:
•
In the VLAN Membership menu, configure the parameters as illustrated in
Figure 5-21.
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> Bridge> VLAN Membership
1.
2.
3.
4.
VLAN ID
Egress Transparent Ports
View VLAN ID to Bridge Port
View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
(400)
(2-3,103)
[]
[]
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-21. Configuring User VLAN Membership (RICi-16E1/T1)
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with User and Management Traffic Separated by VLAN
5-13
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
5.2
Installation and Operation Manual
Application with IP DSLAM and WiMAX
Backhauling over SDH/SONET
Figure 5-1 illustrates a typical application where Egate-100 provides IP DSLAM
and WiMAX backhauling over SDH/SONET, operating opposite RICi-4E1, RICi-E1,
and MiRICi-E1. Management is performed via the Fast Ethernet management port.
A separate VLAN is used for secured management traffic.
Figure 5-22. Egate-100 Application with IP DSLAM and WiMAX Backhauling over SDH/SONET,
Management via Fast Ethernet Port
The following requirements exist for this application:
•
1000 BaseT/BaseSx connection to the packet-switched network
•
E1 links to the SDH/SONET network where RICi-4E1/T1, RICi-E1/T1, and a
router with MIRICi-E1/T1 are installed
•
Fast Ethernet management port
•
Network management station for management.
Table 5-4 shows the framing type and protocol for the E1 channels, as well as
the logical ports and bridge ports used in the application. Table 5-5 shows the
bridge port bindings and egress tag handling. The VLAN memberships are shown
in Table 5-6.
5-14
Application with IP DSLAM and WiMAX Backhauling over SDH/SONET
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Table 5-4. E1 Port Specifications
Unit/Interface
E1 port
numbers
Framing type
Logical port
numbers
Protocol
Bridge port
number
RICi-4E1/T1
41 – 44
Unframed
41 – 44
PPPoHDLC
45
MLPPP, bound to
logical ports 41 – 44
111, bound to
MLPPP port
RICi-E1/T1
45
Unframed
46
HDLC
112
MiRICi-E1/T1
46
CRC 4 enabled
47
GFP (non-LCAS),
VCAT header disabled
113
Table 5-5. Bridge Port Specifications
Bridge port
number
Bind to
Egress tag
handling
1
Host (automatic)
Stripping
2
GbE-1
None
3
GbE-2
None
4
FE MNG
None
111
Logical port 45
None
112
Logical port 46
None
113
Logical port 47
None
Table 5-6. VLAN Memberships
VLAN
Bridge port members
500 (management)
1, 2, 3, 4, 111, 112, 113
The Egate-100 unit is initially configured via an ASCII terminal connection. The
configuration procedure is divided into four main stages:
3. Configuring system parameters (host IP, host tagging, network manager)
4. Configuring physical port parameters (Gigabit Ethernet, SDH/SONET, E1 ports)
5. Configuring the logical layer (logical ports for the E1 ports)
6. Configuring the bridge (configuring bridge to VLAN-aware;, binding the bridge
ports to logical ports, Gigabit Ethernet ports, and Fast Ethernet port;
configuring VLAN membership).
Procedures entailed for each of these stages are included below for E1/SDH.
Note
Procedures are almost identical for T1/SONET with the additional limitation that
T1s for MLPPP bundles must be framed, with 24 timeslots.
Refer to Chapter 4 for further details on the relevant configuration parameters.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with IP DSLAM and WiMAX Backhauling over SDH/SONET
5-15
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
Configuring System Parameters
Make sure that Egate-100 is properly installed and connected to an ASCII
terminal.
³
To configure the host parameters:
1. Display the Host menu (Configuration> System > Management> Host), and
configure the host parameters as illustrated in Figure 5-2.
2. To define host VLAN tagging, in the Host menu select Encapsulation to
navigate to the Encapsulation menu.
3. Configure the host encapsulation parameters as illustrated in Figure 5-23.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Management> Host>
Encapsulation
1. Host Tagging
2. Host VLAN ID[1 - 4094]
3. Host Priority Tag[0 - 7]
>
(Tagged)
... (500)
... (0)
Please select item <1 to 3>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-23. Configuring Host Encapsulation
³
To add the network manager:
1. In the Manager List menu (Main Menu > Configuration > System >
Management > Manager List), move the cursor to the Manager IP cell you
wish to change by clicking <Tab>.
The selected cell is highlighted and the value is displayed in the Change
Cell field.
2. Select Change Cell, and enter 192.188.10.12 for the selected network
manager.
5-16
Application with IP DSLAM and WiMAX Backhauling over SDH/SONET
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Management> Manager List
Num
IP address
1
192.188.10.12
2
0.0.0.0
|
3
0.0.0.0
v
4
0.0.0.0
5
0.0.0.0
6
0.0.0.0
7
0.0.0.0
8
0.0.0.0
9
0.0.0.0
10
0.0.0.0
11
0.0.0.0
12
0.0.0.0
13
0.0.0.0
14
0.0.0.0
15
0.0.0.0
16
0.0.0.0
1. Change cell
Trap
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
... (0.0.0.0)
Please select item <1 to 1>
C - Clear
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
Figure 5-24. Adding Network Manager
Configuring Ethernet Parameters
The Gigabit Ethernet ports must be configured for operation if the default values
are not suitable for the application.
³
To configure the Gigabit Ethernet interface:
•
Display the Ethernet Menu (Main Menu > Configuration > Physical Layer >
Ethernet), and configure the following for both Gigabit Ethernet links
according to your application requirements:
ƒ
Autonegotiation
ƒ
Max capability.
Configuring SDH/SONET Parameters
Configuring SDH/SONET Interface
The clock is provided by the SDH/SONET network, therefore you must configure
the SDH/SONET physical layer to use the timing from the SDH/SONET interface.
³
To configure the SDH/SONET interface timing:
•
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Navigate to the SDH/SONET Physical Port menu (Main Menu > Configuration >
Physical Layer > SDH/SONET) and configure the parameter values as
illustrated in Figure 5-5.
Application with IP DSLAM and WiMAX Backhauling over SDH/SONET
5-17
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
Configuring SDH/SONET E1 ports
You must configure the E1 ports with the appropriate frame type as specified in
Table 5-4. You must configure the following E1 ports:
•
For RICi-4E1/T1: E1 ports 41 – 44, unframed
•
For RICi-E1/T1: E1 port 45, unframed
•
For MiRICi-E1/T1: E1 port 46, framed (CRC 4 enabled).
The E1 port configuration is done in the SDH/SONET Physical Port E1 menu (Main
Menu > Configuration > Physical Layer > SDH/SONET).
³
To configure the E1 ports for RICi-4E1/T1:
1. In the SDH/SONET Physical Port E1 menu, configure E1 port 41 as illustrated
in Figure 5-25.
2. Repeat the same configuration for E1 ports 42 to 44.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> E1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Port Number [1-63]
Administrative Status
Frame Type
Alarms
...
>
>
>
(41)
(Up)
(Unframed)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 4>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-25. Configuring E1 Ports for RICi-4E1/T1
³
To configure the E1 port for RICi-E1/T1:
•
In the SDH/SONET Physical Port E1 menu, configure E1 port 45 as illustrated
in Figure 5-26.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> E1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Port Number [1-63]
Administrative Status
Frame Type
Idle Code [0-ff]
Alarms
...
>
>
...
>
(45)
(Up)
(Unframed)
(0)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 5>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-26. Configuring E1 Port for RICi-E1/T1
5-18
Application with IP DSLAM and WiMAX Backhauling over SDH/SONET
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
³
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
To configure the E1 port for MiRICi-E1/T1:
•
In the SDH/SONET Physical Port E1 menu, configure E1 port 46 as illustrated
in Figure 5-27.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> E1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Port Number [1-63]
Administrative Status
Frame Type
Idle Code [0-ff]
Alarms
...
>
>
...
>
(46)
(Up)
(CRC-4 Enable)
(0)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 5>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-27. Configuring E1 Port for MiRICi-E1/T1
Configuring Logical Layer Parameters
You must configure logical ports for the E1 ports, as specified in Table 5-4. You
must configure the following logical ports:
•
For RICi-4E1/T1: Logical ports 41 – 44 with PPP over HDLC, which are then
bound to logical port 45 with MLPPP protocol
•
For RICi-E1/T1: Logical port 46, HDLC protocol
•
For MiRICi-16E1/T1: Logical port 47, GFP (non-LCAS) protocol with VCAT
header disabled.
The configuration of the logical ports is done in the Logical Layer menu (Main
Menu > Configuration > Logical Layer).
³
To configure the logical layer for the E1 ports to RICi-4E1/T1:
1. In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 41 with PPP over HDLC
protocol, to correspond to physical port 41, as illustrated in Figure 5-28.
2. Repeat the same configuration for logical ports 42 to 44, to correspond to
physical ports 42 to 44.
3. In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 45 with MLPPP protocol,
binding it to logical ports 41 to 44, as illustrated in Figure 5-29.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with IP DSLAM and WiMAX Backhauling over SDH/SONET
5-19
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Logical Layer
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Port Number[1 - 126]
Port Name
Protocol Type
Physical Port Number[1 - 63]
Address & Control Compression
Protocol Field Compression
Alarms
...
...
>
...
>
>
>
(41)
(Logical Port 41)
(PPPoHDLC)
(41)
(On)
(On)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 7>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-28. Configuring PPPoHDLC Logical Ports for RICi-4E1/T1
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer
1. Port Number[1 - 126]
... (45)
2. Port Name
... (Logical Port 45)
3. Protocol Type
>
(MLPPP)
4. Bind Logical Ports
>
(41-44)
5. MTU(bytes)
>
(0)
6. Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
>
Please select item <1 to 6>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-29. Configuring MLPPP Logical Port for RICi-4E1/T1
³
To configure the logical layer for the E1 port to RICi-E1/T1:
•
In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 46 with HDLC protocol, to
correspond to physical port 45, as illustrated in Figure 5-30.
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer
1. Port Number [1 - 126]
...
2. Port Name
...
3. Protocol Type
>
4. Physical Port Number [1 - 63] ...
5. Alarms
>
>
Please select item <1 to 5>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
(46)
(Logical Port 46)
(HDLC)
(45)
(Unmasked)
Figure 5-30. Configuring Logical Port for RICi-E1/T1
5-20
Application with IP DSLAM and WiMAX Backhauling over SDH/SONET
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
³
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
To configure the logical layer for the E1 port to MiRICi-E1/T1:
•
In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 47 with GFP protocol
(non-LCAS), with VCAT header disabled, to correspond to physical port 46, as
illustrated in Figure 5-31.
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer
1. Port Number[1 - 126]
... (47)
2. Port Name
... (Logical Port 47)
3. Protocol Type
>
(GFP)
4. Multi Link
>...(No)
5. Physical Port Number [1 - 63] >
(46)
6. Payload FCS
>
(Disable)
7. VCAT Header
>
(Disable)
8. Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
>
Please select item <1 to 8>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-31. Configuring Logical Port for MiRICi-E1/T1
Configuring Bridge Parameters
The following steps must be performed:
1. Configuring the bridge to VLAN-aware
2. Configuring the bridge ports as specified in Table 5-5
3. Defining VLAN memberships as specified in Table 5-6.
Configuring the Bridge
The bridge must be configured to VLAN-aware, so that Egate-100 forwards traffic
based on VLAN as well as MAC address.
³
To configure the bridge parameters:
•
Navigate to the Bridge menu (Main Menu > Configuration > Applications >
Bridge) and configure the parameter values as illustrated in Figure 5-14.
Configuring the Bridge Ports
The bridge ports required for the application are shown in Table 5-5. The binding
of bridge port 1 to the host port is automatic in Egate-100, so does not have to
be configured. The bridge ports bound to the host and Fast Ethernet
management port must perform egress tag stripping because they handle
management traffic that had the tag added to the frame, therefore it must be
stripped at egress.
The Port VID can be left as the default value for the bridge ports other than the
Fast Ethernet management port, as user frames arrive tagged. For the Fast
Ethernet port, the Port VID is set to the management VLAN ID.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with IP DSLAM and WiMAX Backhauling over SDH/SONET
5-21
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
The configuration of the bridge ports is performed in the Bridge Port menu (Main
Menu > Configuration > Applications > Bridge > Bridge Ports).
³
To configure the bridge port for the host:
•
³
From the Bridge Port menu, configure the Egress Tag Handling for the host
bridge port to perform stripping, as illustrated in Figure 5-15.
To configure the bridge port for the Gigabit Ethernet ports:
1. From the Bridge Port menu, configure the bridge port parameters for bridge
port 2, binding it to GbE-1, as illustrated in Figure 5-16.
2. Repeat the same configuration for bridge port 3, binding it to GbE-2.
³
To configure the bridge port for the Fast Ethernet port:
•
From the Bridge Port menu, configure the bridge port parameters for bridge
port 4, binding it to ETH MNG, as illustrated in Figure 5-32.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Application> Bridge> Bridge Ports
1. Port Number [1 - 130]
2. Port Name
3. Bind to
4. Administrative Status
5. Ingress Filtering
6. Accept Frame Types
7. Port VID [1 - 4094]
8. Default Priority Tag[0 - 7]
9. Replace Priority
10. Egress Tag Handling
11. Ingress Tag Handling
12. Maximum MAC Address[1 - 64000]
... (4)
... (Bridge Port 4)
(ETH MNG)
>
(Up)
>
(Disable)
>
(All)
... (500)
... (0)
>
(No)
>
(Stripping)
>
(None)
>...(64000)
Please select item <1 to 12>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-32. Configuring Bridge Port for Fast Ethernet Port
³
To configure the bridge ports for the logical ports:
1. From the Bridge Port menu, configure the bridge port parameters for bridge
port 111, binding it to logical port 45, as illustrated in Figure 5-33.
2. Repeat the same configuration for bridge ports 112 and 113, binding them to
logical ports 46 and 47 respectively.
5-22
Application with IP DSLAM and WiMAX Backhauling over SDH/SONET
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Application> Bridge> Bridge Ports
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Port Number [1 - 130]
Port Name
Bind to
Logical Port Number [1 - 144]
Administrative Status
Ingress Filtering
Accept Frame Types
Port VID [1 - 4094]
Default Priority Tag[0 - 7]
Replace Priority
Egress Tag Handling
Ingress Tag Handling
Loop Detection
Link OAM(802.3ah)
Maximum MAC Address[1 - 64000]
... (111)
... (Bridge Port 111)
(Logical Port)
(45)
>
(Up)
>
(Enable)
>
(Tag Only)
... (1)
... (0)
>
(No)
>
(None)
>
(None)
>
(Enable)
>...(Disabled)
>...(64000)
Please select item <1 to 15>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-33. Configuring Bridge Port for E1 Port
Configuring the Bridge VLAN Memberships
You must configure the VLAN memberships as specified in Table 5-6. The
following VLAN is required:
ƒ
Management VLAN (500): Contains the host port, the bridge ports bound
to the E1 logical ports, the bridge ports bound to the Gigabit Ethernet
ports, and the bridge port bound to the Fast Ethernet management port.
The configuration of the VLAN memberships is done in the VLAN Membership
menu (Main Menu > Configuration > Applications > Bridge > VLAN Membership).
³
To define the management VLAN memberships:
•
In the VLAN Membership menu, configure the parameters as illustrated in
Figure 5-34.
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> Bridge> VLAN Membership
1.
2.
3.
4.
VLAN ID
Egress Transparent Ports
View VLAN ID to Bridge Port
View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
(500)
(1-4,111-113)
[]
[]
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-34. Configuring Management VLAN Memberships
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with IP DSLAM and WiMAX Backhauling over SDH/SONET
5-23
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
5.3
Installation and Operation Manual
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite
RICi-4T1
Figure 5-35 illustrates a typical application where Egate-100 provides WiMAX
backhauling over SDH/SONET, operating opposite multiple RICi-4T1s. Management
is performed via the Fast Ethernet management port. Different user VLANs are
used for each customer, and a separate VLAN is used for secured management
traffic.
Figure 5-35. Egate-100 Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1,
Management via Fast Ethernet Port
The following requirements exist for this application:
•
1000 BaseT/BaseSx connection to the packet-switched network
•
T3 links to the SDH/SONET network where RICi-4T1s are installed
•
Fast Ethernet management port
•
Network management station for management.
Table 5-7 shows the framing type and protocol for the T1 channels, as well as
the logical ports and bridge ports used in the application. Table 5-8 shows the
bridge port bindings and egress tag handling. The VLAN memberships are shown
in Table 5-9.
5-24
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Table 5-7. T1 Port Specifications
Unit
T3 port
number
T1 port
numbers
Framing
type
Logical
port
numbers
Protocol
RICi-4T1 (A)
1
22 – 25
Framed, D4
22 – 25
PPPoHDLC
120
MLPPP, bound to
logical ports 22 – 25
53 – 56
PPPoHDLC
121
MLPPP, bound to
logical ports 53 – 56
77 – 80
PPPoHDLC
122
MLPPP, bound to
logical ports 77 – 80
81 – 84
PPPoHDLC
123
MLPPP, bound to
logical ports 81 – 84
RICi-4T1 (B)
RICi-4T1 (C)
RICi-4T1 (D)
2
3
3
53 – 56
Framed, D4
77 – 80
Framed, D4
81 – 84
Framed, D4
Bridge port
number
120, bound to
MLPPP port
121, bound to
MLPPP port
122, bound to
MLPPP port
123, bound to
MLPPP port
Table 5-8. Bridge Port Specifications
Bridge port
number
Bind to
Egress tag
handling
1
Host (automatic)
Stripping
2
GbE-1
None
3
GbE-2
None
4
FE MNG
None
120
Logical port 120
None
121
Logical port 121
None
122
Logical port 122
None
123
Logical port 123
None
Table 5-9. VLAN Memberships
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
VLAN
Bridge port members
100 – management data
1, 2, 3, 4, 120, 121, 122, 123
200 – RICi-4E1/T1 (A) user data
2, 3, 120
300 – RICi-4E1/T1 (B) user data
2, 3, 121
400 – RICi-4E1/T1 (C) user data
2, 3, 122
500 – RICi-4E1/T1 (D) user data
2, 3, 123
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
5-25
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
The Egate-100 unit is initially configured via an ASCII terminal connection. The
configuration procedure is divided into four main stages:
1. Configuring system parameters (host IP, host tagging, network manager,
clock source)
2. Configuring physical port parameters (Gigabit Ethernet, SDH/SONET, T1 ports)
3. Configuring the logical layer (logical ports for the T1 ports)
4. Configuring the bridge (configuring bridge to VLAN-aware;, binding the bridge
ports to logical ports, Gigabit Ethernet ports, and Fast Ethernet port;
configuring VLAN membership).
Procedures entailed for each of these stages are included below for T1/SONET.
Refer to Chapter 4 for further details on the relevant configuration parameters.
Configuring System Parameters
Make sure that Egate-100 is properly installed and connected to an ASCII
terminal.
³
To configure the host parameters:
1. Display the Host menu (Configuration> System > Management> Host), and
configure the host parameters as illustrated in Figure 5-2.
2. To define host VLAN tagging, in the Host menu select Encapsulation to
navigate to the Encapsulation menu.
3. Configure the host encapsulation parameters as illustrated in Figure 5-3.
³
To add the network manager:
1. In the Manager List menu (Main Menu > Configuration > System >
Management > Manager List), move the cursor to the Manager IP cell you
wish to change by clicking <Tab>.
The selected cell is highlighted and the value is displayed in the Change
Cell field.
2. Select Change Cell, and enter 192.188.10.12 for the selected network
manager.
5-26
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Management> Manager List
Num
IP address
1
192.188.10.12
2
0.0.0.0
|
3
0.0.0.0
v
4
0.0.0.0
5
0.0.0.0
6
0.0.0.0
7
0.0.0.0
8
0.0.0.0
9
0.0.0.0
10
0.0.0.0
11
0.0.0.0
12
0.0.0.0
13
0.0.0.0
14
0.0.0.0
15
0.0.0.0
16
0.0.0.0
1. Change cell
Trap
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
Unmask
... (0.0.0.0)
Please select item <1 to 1>
C - Clear
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
Figure 5-36. Adding Network Manager
³
To configure the system clock source:
1. Navigate to the master clock source menu (Main Menu > Configuration >
System > Clock Source > Master Clock) and configure the parameter values as
illustrated in Figure 5-37.
2. Navigate to the fallback clock source menu (Main Menu > Configuration >
System > Clock Source > Fallback Clock) and configure the parameter values
as illustrated in Figure 5-38.
Egate-100
…Configuration> System> Clock Source> Master Clock
1. Source
>
(Rx Clock)
2. Wait to Restore(sec)[0 - 720] ... (300)
3. Port Number [1 - 3]
... (1)
>
Please select item <1 to 3>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-37. Configuring Master Clock Source
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
5-27
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Clock Source> Fallback Clock
1. Source
>
(Internal)
2. Wait to Restore (sec)[0 - 720]... (300)
3. Port Number [1 - 3]
... (2)
Please select item <1 to 3>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-38. Configuring Fallback Clock Source
Configuring Ethernet Parameters
The Gigabit Ethernet ports must be configured for operation if the default values
are not suitable for the application.
³
To configure the Gigabit Ethernet interface:
•
Display the Ethernet Menu (Main Menu > Configuration > Physical Layer >
Ethernet), and configure the following for both Gigabit Ethernet links
according to your application requirements:
ƒ
Autonegotiation
ƒ
Max capability.
Configuring SDH/SONET Parameters
Configuring SDH/SONET Interface
The clock is provided by the SDH/SONET network, therefore you must configure
the SDH/SONET physical layer to use the timing from the SDH/SONET interface.
³
To configure the SDH/SONET interface timing:
•
5-28
Navigate to the SDH/SONET Physical Port menu (Main Menu > Configuration >
Physical Layer > SDH/SONET) and configure the parameter values as
illustrated in Figure 5-39.
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Egate-100
Configuration> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Frame Type
Tx Clock
Administrative Status & Alarms
Mapping
E1/T1
SOH
HVC
LVC
>
>
>
[]
>
>
>
>
(SONET)
(Loopback Timing)
>
Please select item <1 to 8>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-39. SDH/SONET Menu
Configuring T3 and T1 ports
You must configure the T3 ports with the clock source, and the T1 ports with the
appropriate frame type as specified in Table 5-7. You must configure the
following T3 and T1 ports:
•
For RICi-4T1 (A): T3 port 1, T1 ports 22 – 25, framed, D4
•
For RICi-4T1 (B): T3 port 2, T1 ports 53 – 56, framed, D4
•
For RICi-4T1 (C): T3 port 3, T1 ports 77 – 80, framed, D4
•
For RICi-4T1 (D): T3 port 3, T1 ports 81 – 84, framed, D4.
The T3 port configuration is done in the Physical Port T3 menu (Main Menu >
Configuration > Physical Layer > T3).
The T1 port configuration is done in the Physical Port T3 T1 menu (Main Menu >
Configuration > Physical Layer > T3 > T1).
³
To configure the T3 and T1 ports for RICi-4T1 (A):
1. In the Physical Port T3 menu, configure T3 port 1 as illustrated in Figure 5-40.
2. Navigate to the Physical Port T1 menu by selecting T1.
3. In the Physical Port T1 menu, configure T1 port 22 as illustrated in
Figure 5-41.
4. Repeat the same configuration for T1 ports 23 to 25.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
5-29
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Configuration> Physical Layer> T3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Port Number [1 - n]
Administrative Status
Transmit Clock Source
Line type
Line length
Alarms
T1
...
>
>
>
>
>
>
(1)
(Up)
(Loopback Timing)
(M23)
(Long)
(Unmasked)
>
Please select item <1 to 7>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-40. Configuring T3 Port for RICi-4T1 (A)
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> T3> T1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Port Number [1-28]
Administrative Status
Frame Type
Idle code[0 – ff]
Alarms
... (22)
>
(Up)
>
(D4)
...(0)
>
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 5>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-41. Configuring T1 Ports for RICi-4T1 (A)
³
To configure the T3 and T1 ports for RICi-4T1 (B):
1. In the Physical Port T3 menu, configure T3 port 2 as illustrated in Figure 5-42.
2. Navigate to the Physical Port T1 menu by selecting T1.
3. In the Physical Port T1 menu, configure T1 port 53 as illustrated in
Figure 5-43.
4. Repeat the same configuration for T1 ports 54 to 56.
5-30
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Egate-100
Configuration> Physical Layer> T3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Port Number [1 - n]
Administrative Status
Transmit Clock Source
Line type
Line length
Alarms
T1
...
>
>
>
>
>
>
(2)
(Up)
(Loopback Timing)
(M23)
(Long)
(Unmasked)
>
Please select item <1 to 7>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-42. Configuring T3 Port for RICi-4T1 (B)
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> T3> T1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Port Number [29-56]
Administrative Status
Frame Type
Idle code[0 – ff]
Alarms
... (52)
>
(Up)
>
(D4)
...(0)
>
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 5>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-43. Configuring T1 Ports for RICi-4T1 (B)
³
To configure the T3 and T1 ports for RICi-4T1 (C):
1. In the Physical Port T3 menu, configure T3 port 3 as illustrated in Figure 5-44.
2. Navigate to the Physical Port T1 menu by selecting T1.
3. In the Physical Port T1 menu, configure T1 port 77 as illustrated in
Figure 5-45.
4. Repeat the same configuration for T1 ports 78 to 80.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
5-31
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Configuration> Physical Layer> T3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Port Number [1 - n]
Administrative Status
Transmit Clock Source
Line type
Line length
Alarms
T1
...
>
>
>
>
>
>
(3)
(Up)
(Loopback Timing)
(M23)
(Long)
(Unmasked)
>
Please select item <1 to 7>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-44. Configuring T3 Port for RICi-4T1 (C)
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> T3> T1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Port Number [57-84]
Administrative Status
Frame Type
Idle code[0 – ff]
Alarms
... (77)
>
(Up)
>
(D4)
...(0)
>
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 5>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-45. Configuring T1 Ports for RICi-4T1 (C)
³
To configure the T1 ports for RICi-4T1 (D):
1. In the Physical Port T3 menu, select T3 port 3, and then navigate to the
Physical Port T1 menu by selecting T1. (It is not necessary to configure
T3 port 3, as it was already configured in the procedure for RICi-4T1 (C).)
2. In the Physical Port T1 menu, configure T1 port 81 as illustrated in
Figure 5-46.
3. Repeat the same configuration for T1 ports 82 to 84.
5-32
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Physical Layer> T3> T1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Port Number [57-84]
Administrative Status
Frame Type
Idle code[0 – ff]
Alarms
... (81)
>
(Up)
>
(D4)
...(0)
>
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 5>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-46. Configuring T1 Ports for RICi-4T1 (D)
Configuring Logical Layer Parameters
You must configure logical ports for the T1 ports, as specified in Table 5-7. You
must configure the following logical ports:
•
For RICi-4T1 (A): Logical ports 22 – 25 with PPP over HDLC, which are then
bound to logical port 120 with MLPPP protocol
•
For RICi-4T1 (B): Logical ports 53 – 56 with PPP over HDLC, which are then
bound to logical port 121 with MLPPP protocol
•
For RICi-4T1 (C): Logical ports 77 – 80 with PPP over HDLC, which are then
bound to logical port 122 with MLPPP protocol
•
For RICi-4T1 (D): Logical ports 81 – 84 with PPP over HDLC, which are then
bound to logical port 123 with MLPPP protocol.
The configuration of the logical ports is done in the Logical Layer menu (Main
Menu > Configuration > Logical Layer).
³
To configure the logical layer for the T1 ports to RICi-4T1 (A):
1. In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 22 with PPP over HDLC
protocol, to correspond to physical port 22, as illustrated in Figure 5-47.
2. Repeat the same configuration for logical ports 23 to 25, to correspond to
physical ports 23 to 25.
3. In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 120 with MLPPP protocol,
binding it to logical ports 22 to 25, as illustrated in Figure 5-48.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
5-33
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Logical Layer
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Port Number[1 - 126]
Port Name
Protocol Type
Physical Port Number[1 - 84]
Address & Control Compression
Protocol Field Compression
Alarms
...
...
>
...
>
>
>
(22)
(Logical Port 22)
(PPPoHDLC)
(22)
(On)
(On)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 7>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-47. Configuring PPPoHDLC Logical Ports for RICi-4T1 (A)
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer
1. Port Number[1 - 126]
... (120)
2. Port Name
... (Logical Port 120)
3. Protocol Type
>
(MLPPP)
4. Bind Logical Ports
>
(22-25)
5. MTU(bytes)
>
(0)
6. Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
>
Please select item <1 to 6>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-48. Configuring MLPPP Logical Port for RICi-4T1 (A)
³
To configure the logical layer for the T1 ports to RICi-4T1 (B):
1. In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 53 with PPP over HDLC
protocol, to correspond to physical port 53, as illustrated in Figure 5-49.
2. Repeat the same configuration for logical ports 54 to 56, to correspond to
physical ports 54 to 56.
3. In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 121 with MLPPP protocol,
binding it to logical ports 53 to 56, as illustrated in Figure 5-50.
5-34
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Logical Layer
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Port Number[1 - 126]
Port Name
Protocol Type
Physical Port Number[1 - 84]
Address & Control Compression
Protocol Field Compression
Alarms
...
...
>
...
>
>
>
(53)
(Logical Port 53)
(PPPoHDLC)
(53)
(On)
(On)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 7>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-49. Configuring PPPoHDLC Logical Ports for RICi-4T1 (B)
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer
1. Port Number[1 - 126]
... (121)
2. Port Name
... (Logical Port 121)
3. Protocol Type
>
(MLPPP)
4. Bind Logical Ports
>
(53-56)
5. MTU(bytes)
>
(0)
6. Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
>
Please select item <1 to 6>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-50. Configuring MLPPP Logical Port for RICi-4T1 (B)
³
To configure the logical layer for the T1 ports to RICi-4T1 (C):
1. In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 77 with PPP over HDLC
protocol, to correspond to physical port 77, as illustrated in Figure 5-51.
2. Repeat the same configuration for logical ports 78 to 80, to correspond to
physical ports 78 to 80.
3. In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 122 with MLPPP protocol,
binding it to logical ports 77 to 80, as illustrated in Figure 5-52.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
5-35
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Logical Layer
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Port Number[1 - 126]
Port Name
Protocol Type
Physical Port Number[1 - 84]
Address & Control Compression
Protocol Field Compression
Alarms
...
...
>
...
>
>
>
(77)
(Logical Port 77)
(PPPoHDLC)
(77)
(On)
(On)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 7>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-51. Configuring PPPoHDLC Logical Ports for RICi-4T1 (C)
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer
1. Port Number[1 - 126]
... (122)
2. Port Name
... (Logical Port 122)
3. Protocol Type
>
(MLPPP)
4. Bind Logical Ports
>
(77-80)
5. MTU(bytes)
>
(0)
6. Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
>
Please select item <1 to 6>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-52. Configuring MLPPP Logical Port for RICi-4T1 (C)
³
To configure the logical layer for the T1 ports to RICi-4T1 (D):
1. In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 81 with PPP over HDLC
protocol, to correspond to physical port 81, as illustrated in Figure 5-53.
2. Repeat the same configuration for logical ports 82 to 84, to correspond to
physical ports 82 to 84.
3. In the Logical Layer menu, configure logical port 120 with MLPPP protocol,
binding it to logical ports 81 to 84, as illustrated in Figure 5-54.
5-36
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Logical Layer
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Port Number[1 - 126]
Port Name
Protocol Type
Physical Port Number[1 - 84]
Address & Control Compression
Protocol Field Compression
Alarms
...
...
>
...
>
>
>
(81)
(Logical Port 81)
(PPPoHDLC)
(81)
(On)
(On)
(Unmasked)
Please select item <1 to 7>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-53. Configuring PPPoHDLC Logical Ports for RICi-4T1 (D)
Egate-100
Configuration> Logical Layer
1. Port Number[1 - 126]
... (123)
2. Port Name
... (Logical Port 123)
3. Protocol Type
>
(MLPPP)
4. Bind Logical Ports
>
(81-84)
5. MTU(bytes)
>
(0)
6. Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
>
Please select item <1 to 6>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-54. Configuring MLPPP Logical Port for RICi-4T1 (D)
Configuring Bridge Parameters
The following steps must be performed:
1. Configuring the bridge to VLAN-aware
2. Configuring the bridge ports as specified in Table 5-8
3. Defining VLAN memberships as specified in Table 5-9.
Configuring the Bridge
The bridge must be configured to VLAN-aware, so that Egate-100 forwards traffic
based on VLAN as well as MAC address.
³
To configure the bridge parameters:
•
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Navigate to the Bridge menu (Main Menu > Configuration > Applications >
Bridge) and configure the parameter values as illustrated in Figure 5-14.
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
5-37
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
Configuring the Bridge Ports
The bridge ports required for the application are shown in Table 5-8. The binding
of bridge port 1 to the host port is automatic in Egate-100, so does not have to
be configured. The bridge ports bound to the host and Fast Ethernet
management port must perform egress tag stripping because they handle
management traffic that had the tag added to the frame, therefore it must be
stripped at egress.
The Port VID can be left as the default value for the bridge ports other than the
Fast Ethernet management port, as user frames arrive tagged. For the Fast
Ethernet port, the Port VID is set to the management VLAN ID.
The configuration of the bridge ports is performed in the Bridge Port menu (Main
Menu > Configuration > Applications > Bridge > Bridge Ports).
³
To configure the bridge port for the host:
•
³
From the Bridge Port menu, configure the Egress Tag Handling for the host
bridge port to perform stripping, as illustrated in Figure 5-15.
To configure the bridge port for the Gigabit Ethernet ports:
1. From the Bridge Port menu, configure the bridge port parameters for bridge
port 2, binding it to GbE-1, as illustrated in Figure 5-16.
2. Repeat the same configuration for bridge port 3, binding it to GbE-2.
³
To configure the bridge port for the Fast Ethernet port:
•
³
From the Bridge Port menu, configure the bridge port parameters for bridge
port 4, binding it to ETH MNG, as illustrated in Figure 5-55.
To configure the bridge ports for the logical ports:
1. From the Bridge Port menu, configure the bridge port parameters for bridge
port 120, binding it to logical port 120, as illustrated in Figure 5-56.
2. Repeat the same configuration for bridge ports 121 to 123, binding them to
logical ports 121 to 123 respectively.
5-38
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Application> Bridge> Bridge Ports
1. Port Number [1 - 130]
2. Port Name
3. Bind to
4. Administrative Status
5. Ingress Filtering
6. Accept Frame Types
7. Port VID [1 - 4094]
8. Default Priority Tag[0 - 7]
9. Replace Priority
10. Egress Tag Handling
11. Ingress Tag Handling
12. Maximum MAC Address[1 - 64000]
... (4)
... (Bridge Port 4)
(ETH MNG)
>
(Up)
>
(Disable)
>
(All)
... (100)
... (0)
>
(No)
>
(Stripping)
>
(None)
>...(64000)
Please select item <1 to 12>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-55. Configuring Bridge Port for Fast Ethernet Port
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> Application> Bridge> Bridge Ports
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Port Number [1 - 130]
Port Name
Bind to
Logical Port Number [1 - 144]
Administrative Status
Ingress Filtering
Accept Frame Types
Port VID [1 - 4094]
Default Priority Tag[0 - 7]
Replace Priority
Egress Tag Handling
Ingress Tag Handling
Loop Detection
Link OAM(802.3ah)
Maximum MAC Address[1 - 64000]
... (120)
... (Bridge Port 120)
(Logical Port)
(120)
>
(Up)
>
(Enable)
>
(Tag Only)
... (1)
... (0)
>
(No)
>
(None)
>
(None)
>
(Enable)
>...(Disabled)
>...(64000)
Please select item <1 to 15>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port; R - Remove Port; S - Save
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-56. Configuring Bridge Port for T1 Port
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
5-39
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
Configuring the Bridge VLAN Memberships
You must configure the VLAN memberships as specified in Table 5-9. The
following VLANs are required:
ƒ
Management VLAN (100): Contains the host port, the bridge ports bound
to the T1 logical ports, the bridge ports bound to the Gigabit Ethernet
ports, and the bridge port bound to the Fast Ethernet management port.
ƒ
User VLAN for RICi-4T1 (A): Contains the bridge port bound to the logical
port for the T1 ports to RICi-4T1 (A), and the bridge ports bound to the
Gigabit Ethernet ports
ƒ
User VLAN for RICi-4T1 (B): Contains the bridge port bound to the logical
port for the T1 ports to RICi-4T1 (B), and the bridge ports bound to the
Gigabit Ethernet ports
ƒ
User VLAN for RICi-4T1 (C): Contains the bridge port bound to the logical
port for the T1 ports to RICi-4T1 (C), and the bridge ports bound to the
Gigabit Ethernet ports
ƒ
User VLAN for RICi-4T1 (D): Contains the bridge port bound to the logical
port for the T1 ports to RICi-4T1 (D), and the bridge ports bound to the
Gigabit Ethernet ports.
The configuration of the VLAN memberships is done in the VLAN Membership
menu (Main Menu > Configuration > Applications > Bridge > VLAN Membership).
³
To define the management VLAN memberships:
•
In the VLAN Membership menu, configure the parameters as illustrated in
Figure 5-57.
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> Bridge> VLAN Membership
1.
2.
3.
4.
VLAN ID
Egress Transparent Ports
View VLAN ID to Bridge Port
View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
(100)
(1-4,120-123)
[]
[]
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-57. Configuring Management VLAN Memberships
³
To define the memberships for the user VLAN for RICi-4T1 (A):
•
5-40
In the VLAN Membership menu, configure the parameters as illustrated in
Figure 5-58.
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> Bridge> VLAN Membership
1.
2.
3.
4.
VLAN ID
Egress Transparent Ports
View VLAN ID to Bridge Port
View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
(200)
(2-3,120)
[]
[]
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-58. Configuring User VLAN Membership for RICi-4T1 (A)
³
To define the memberships for the user VLAN for RICi-4T1 (B):
•
In the VLAN Membership menu, configure the parameters as illustrated in
Figure 5-59.
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> Bridge> VLAN Membership
1.
2.
3.
4.
VLAN ID
Egress Transparent Ports
View VLAN ID to Bridge Port
View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
(300)
(2-3,121)
[]
[]
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-59. Configuring User VLAN Membership for RICi-4T1 (B)
³
To define the memberships for the user VLAN for RICi-4T1 (C):
•
In the VLAN Membership menu, configure the parameters as illustrated in
Figure 5-60.
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> Bridge> VLAN Membership
1.
2.
3.
4.
VLAN ID
Egress Transparent Ports
View VLAN ID to Bridge Port
View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
(400)
(2-3,122)
[]
[]
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-60. Configuring User VLAN Membership for RICi-4T1 (C)
³
To define the memberships for the user VLAN for RICi-4T1 (D):
•
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
In the VLAN Membership menu, configure the parameters as illustrated in
Figure 5-61.
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
5-41
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Configuration> Application> Bridge> VLAN Membership
1.
2.
3.
4.
VLAN ID
Egress Transparent Ports
View VLAN ID to Bridge Port
View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
(500)
(2-3,123)
[]
[]
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 5-61. Configuring User VLAN Membership for RICi-4T1 (D)
5-42
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
5-43
Chapter 5 Configuring Typical Applications
5-44
Application with WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Chapter 6
Diagnostics and
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the unit's monitoring and diagnostics functions:
•
Displaying device information, alarms, and events
•
Checking the current master and fallback clock sources
•
Displaying status of the physical interfaces
•
Displaying statistics for the logical layer
•
Displaying MAC table and bridge statistics
•
Performing ping and other tests and viewing self-test results.
6.1
Monitoring Performance
Viewing System Status Information
You can view device information, as well as MAC address, system up time, date
and time, and security key (SSL, SSH, or SSL+SSH).
³
To view the system status:
•
Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > System.
The System Monitoring menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-1 through
Figure 6-4, depending on whether APS and Ethernet link aggregation are
enabled.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Monitoring Performance
6-1
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> System
MAC address
System Up Time
Date
Time
Security Key
Active Alarms
Event Log
Current Clock Source
Connected Managers
Radius Statistics
Syslog Statistics
(00-20-D2-23-35-88)
(00:16:32)
(2006-03-14)
(17:10:28)
(SSL + SSH)
1.
[]
2.
>
3.
>
4.
[]
5.
[]
6.
>
>
Please select item <1 to 6>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-1. System Monitoring Menu, APS and Ethernet Link Aggregation Not
Enabled
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> System
MAC address
System Up Time
Date
Time
Security Key
Active Alarms
Event Log
Current Clock Source
APS
Connected Managers
Radius Statistics
Syslog Statistics
(00-20-D2-23-35-88)
(00:16:32)
(2006-03-14)
(17:10:28)
(SSL + SSH)
1.
[]
2.
>
3.
>
4.
>
5.
[]
6.
[]
7.
>
>
Please select item <1 to 6>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-2. System Monitoring Menu, APS Enabled, Ethernet Link Aggregation Not
Enabled
6-2
Monitoring Performance
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> System
MAC address
System Up Time
Date
Time
Security Key
Ethernet Aggregation Active Link
1. Active Alarms
2. Event Log
3. Current Clock Source
4. Connected Managers
5. Radius Statistics
6. Syslog Statistics
>
Please select item <1 to 6>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
(00-20-D2-23-35-88)
(00:16:32)
(2006-03-14)
(17:10:28)
(SSL + SSH)
(GETH_1)
[]
>
>
[]
[]
>
Figure 6-3. System Monitoring Menu, APS Not Enabled, Ethernet Link Aggregation
Enabled
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> System
MAC address
System Up Time
Date
Time
Security Key
Active Alarms
Event Log
Current Clock Source
Protection
Connected Managers
Radius Statistics
Syslog Statistics
(00-20-D2-23-35-88)
(00:16:32)
(2006-03-14)
(17:10:28)
(SSL + SSH)
1.
[]
2.
>
3.
>
4.
>
5.
[]
6.
[]
7.
>
>
Please select item <1 to 6>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-4. System Monitoring Menu, APS and Ethernet Link Aggregation Enabled
Viewing the Clock Sources
Note
³
This section is relevant only if the unit has a T3 interface.
To check what the current clock sources are:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > System > Current Clock Source.
The Current Clock Source menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-5.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Monitoring Performance
6-3
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and Operation Manual
2. Select Nodal Mode, and specify which clock you wish to monitor, the Master
or the Fallback clock.
The current source of the Master or Fallback clock appears.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> System> Current Clock Source
Nodal Mode
Source
Source Port
>
>
>
(Master)
(Internal)
(SDH/SONET)
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-5. Current Clock Source Menu – Master Clock
Viewing the Connected Managers
³
To check what the current managers are:
•
Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > System > Connected Managers.
The Connected Managers menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-6.
Egate-100
Monitoring> System> Connected Managers
Index
0
1
2
3
IP Address
0.0.0.0
192.144.162.121
172.55.144.60
172.55.144.60
Terminal Type
UART
TELNET
SSH
SSL
User Name
SU
SU
SU
User
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-6. Connected Managers Menu
Table 6-1. Connected Managers Parameters
Parameter
Description
Index
Manager’s serial number in the list of managers
IP Address
IP Address of the manager connecting remote agent.
For UART this field is not used.
Terminal Type
Manager’s terminal type
(UART, TELNET, WEB, SSL, or SSH)
User Name
6-4
Monitoring Performance
Egate-100 login user name
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Viewing Link Protection Status
Viewing Ethernet Link Aggregation Status
³
To view Ethernet link aggregation status:
3. Follow the path: Main Menu> Monitoring > System.
The Monitoring System menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-1 through
Figure 6-4, depending on the status of APS and Ethernet Link
aggregation. If the Monitoring System menu does not contain Protection
or Ethernet Aggregation Active Link, then Ethernet link aggregation is not
enabled.
4. If the Monitoring System menu contains Protection, select it.
The Monitoring System Protection menu appears as illustrated in
Figure 6-7.
5. The Ethernet Aggregation Active Link parameter contains one of the
following:
ƒ
GETH_1 – The first Gigabit Ethernet port is the active link
ƒ
GETH_2 – The second Gigabit Ethernet port is the active link
ƒ
N/A – Although Ethernet link aggregation is enabled, the Gigabit Ethernet
ports are not both set to the same data rate, or to full duplex, or the
active link was not yet set.
Egate-100
Monitoring> System> Protection
Ethernet Aggregation Active Link
1. APS
>
(GETH_1)
>
Please select item <1 to 1>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-7. Monitoring Protection Menu
Viewing APS Status
³
To view APS status for STM-1/OC-3:
1. Follow the path: Main Menu> Monitoring > System.
The Monitoring System menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-1 through
Figure 6-4, depending on the status of APS and Ethernet Link
aggregation. If the Monitoring System menu does not contain APS or
Protection, then APS is not enabled.
ƒ
If the Monitoring System menu contains APS, select it.
The System APS status menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-8.
ƒ
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
If the Monitoring System menu contains Protection, select it and then
select APS from the Monitoring System Protection menu (Figure 6-7).
Monitoring Performance
6-5
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and Operation Manual
The System APS status menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-8.
2. Select Signal Fail & Degrade for status per port as illustrated in Figure 6-9.
3. Select Total Counter for current status and cumulative counts of mode
mismatch, channel mismatch, switch-byte failure and FE-protection-line
failure, as illustrated in Figure 6-10.
Egate-100
Monitoring> System> APS (or Monitoring> System> Protection>APS)
APS Mode
>
Current Working Port
RX K1K2(Hex)
TX K1K2(Hex)
1. Signal Fail & Degrade
2. Total Counter
3. Clear Counters
>
(1+1 optimized
bidirectional)
(1)
(0000)
(0000)
[]
[]
>
Please select item <1 to 3>
F – Forwards; B - Backwards
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-8. APS Status Menu
Table 6-2 APS Status Parameters
Parameter
Description
RX K1K2(Hex),
TX K1K2(Hex)
Bits 1-4 of K1 byte indicate the request - 0 – No request ; 1 – Do not revert ; 2 –
Reverse request ; 8 – Manual switch ; 10 – SD low priority ; 11 – SD high priority
; 12 – SF low priority ; 13 – SF high priority ; 14 – Force switch ; 15 – Lockout
Bits 5-8 of the K1 byte indicate the channel associated with the request – to
which channel the request refers
Bits 1-4 of the K2 byte indicate the channel:
In 1+1 optimized bi-directional mode, bridge status indicates which section is
currently the primary section.
In uni-directional mode, bridge status indicates where the data is located (0=on
the current working link, 1=on the protected link).
In 1+1 optimized bi-directional mode: 1; 2
In uni-directional mode: 0; 1
Signal Fail and Degrade
See Figure 6-9
Total Counter
See Figure 6-10
Clear Counters
Command to reset all the APS counters
6-6
Monitoring Performance
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Egate-100
Monitoring> System> APS> Signal Fail & Degrade
Port
1
2
State
Status
Primary
Secondary
SF
SF
SF Count
1
1
SD Count
805306368
805306368
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
Figure 6-9. APS Signal Fail/Degrade Status
Table 6-3 APS Signal Fail/Degrade Status Parameters
Parameter
Description
Slot/Port
SDH/SONET Port or slot number
State
APS activation state (Primary/Secondary)
Status
Lockout: Locked command was set; jump to secondary link not permitted
SD: Signal Degrade detected
SF: Signal Fail detected
Switch: request to switch occurred, causing switch between links
Wait to Restore: wait to restore timing count
SF Count
Signal failure count
SD Count
Signal degradation count
Egate-100
Monitoring> System> APS> Total Counter
Status Item
Current Status
Mode Mismatch
No
Channel Mismatch
No
Switch Byte Failure
No
FE Protection Line Failure
No
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
Total
2
3
0
0
Figure 6-10. APS Total Counter Status
Table 6-4 APS Total Counter Status Parameters
Parameter
Description
Mode Mismatch
A conflict between the current local mode and the received K2 mode information
constitutes a mode mismatch. Monitor protection line K2 bit 5 indicates the
architecture, and K2 bits 6-8 indicate the mode (unidirectional or bi-directional).
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Monitoring Performance
6-7
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Description
Channel Mismatch
Indicates that a mismatch between the transmitted K1 channel and the received K2
channel has been detected..
Switch Byte Failure
Indicates that a protection switch byte failure is in effect. This condition occurs when
either an inconsistent APS byte or an invalid code is detected.
FE Protection Line
Failure
³
•
An inconsistent APS byte occurs when no three consecutive K1 bytes of the last
12 successive frames are identical.
•
An invalid code occurs when the incoming K1 byte contains an unused code or a
code irrelevant for the specific switching operation, in three consecutive frames.
An invalid code also occurs when the incoming frame contains an invalid channel
number in three consecutive frames.
Monitor the K1 byte for Far End Protection Failure. A Far End Protection Line defect is
declared based on receiving signal failure on the protection line.
To clear APS counters:
1. Navigate to Main Menu> Monitoring > System> APS (or Main Menu>
Monitoring > System> Protection > APS).
The APS status menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-8.
2. Select Clear Counters.
The following confirmation message is displayed:
Clear APS counters. Are you sure? (Y/N)
3. Type Y to clear the APS counters.
Viewing Physical Layer Status
You can access physical layer status options from the Monitoring Physical Layer
menu.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> Physical Layer
1. Ethernet
2. SDH/SONET
>
>
Please select item <1 to 2>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-11. Monitoring Physical Layer Menu (STM-1/OC-3)
6-8
Monitoring Performance
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> Physical Layer
1. Ethernet
2. T3
>
>
Please select item <1 to 2>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-12. Monitoring Physical Layer Menu (T3)
Viewing STM-1/OC-3 Status
³
To view interface status for STM-1/OC-3
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > Physical Layer > SDH/SONET.
The SDH/SONET monitoring menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-13.
2. Select Interface.
The SDH/SONET interface status menu appears as illustrated in
Figure 6-13.
Egate-100
Monitoring> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET
1. SFP
2. SOH
3. HVC
4. LVC
5. Free Resources
>
Please select item <1 to 5>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
>
>
>
>
[]
Figure 6-13. SDH/SONET Monitoring
Egate-100
Monitoring> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> Interface
Connector Type
>
(SFP-In)
Administrative Status
>
(Up)
Operation Status
>
(Down)
Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
1. Port
>
(1)
>
Please select item <1 to 1>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-14. SDH/SONET Interface Menu
³
To view SFP status for STM-1/OC-3 :
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > Physical Layer > SDH/SONET > SFP.
The SDH/SONET SFP status menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-15.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Monitoring Performance
6-9
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and Operation Manual
2. For Port Number, specify the number of the port you wish to monitor.
The port’s SFP status is displayed as illustrated in Figure 6-15.
Egate-100
Monitoring> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET>SFP
Connector Type
Manufacturer Name
Typical Max. Range
Wave Length
Fiber Type
TX Power (dBm)
RX Power (dBm)
Laser Bias (mA)
Laser Temperature(C)
1. Port Number
...
...
...
>
>
...
...
...
...
>
(RJ45)
(Infineon FO GmbH)
(0)
(1310nm)
(SM)
(2158524704)
(2158524704)
(2158524704)
(2158524704)
(1)
>
Please select item <1 to 1>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-15. SDH/SONET SFP Status Menu
³
To view HVC status for STM-1/OC-3:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > Physical Layer > SDH/SONET > HVC.
The SDH/SONET HVC status menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-16.
2. For Port, specify the number of the port you wish to monitor.
The port’s HVC status is displayed.
Egate-100
Monitoring> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> HVC
Received Payload Label[0 -... (FF)
Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
1. Port
>
(1)
>
Please select item <1 to 1>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-16. SDH/SONET HVC Status Menu
³
To view LVC status for STM-1/OC-3:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > Physical Layer > SDH/SONET > LVC.
The SDH/SONET LVC status menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-17.
2. For VC, specify the number of the VC you wish to monitor.
The VC’s status is displayed.
6-10
Monitoring Performance
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Egate-100
Monitoring> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> LVC
Received Payload Label[0 – fff] ... (07)
Alarms
>
(Unmasked)
1. VC[1 - 63]
... (1)
>
Please select item <1 to 1>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-17. SDH/SONET LVC Status Menu
³
To view the free resources status for STM-1/OC-3:
•
To view free resources (no logical ports assigned), Navigate to Main Menu>
Monitoring > Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> Free Resources.
The SDH/SONET Free Resources status menu appears as illustrated in
Figure 6-17.
Egate-100
Monitoring> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> Free Resources
Physical
Mapping
Frame Type
Free Timeslots
63 STS1-3/VT Group-7VT1.5-1
ESF
1-25
64 STS1-3/VT Group-7VT1.5-2
ESF
1-25
65 STS1-3/VT Group-7VT1.5-2
ESF
1-25
66 STS1-3/VT Group-7VT1.5-2
ESF
1-25
67 STS1-3/VT Group-7VT1.5-2
ESF
1-25
68 STS1-3/VT Group-7VT1.5-2
ESF
1-25
69 STS1-3/VT Group-7VT1.5-2
ESF
1-25
70 STS1-3/VT Group-7VT1.5-2
ESF
1-25
71 STS1-3/VT Group-7VT1.5-3
ESF
1-25
72 STS1-3/VT Group-7VT1.5-3
ESF
1-25
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 6-18. SDH/SONET Free Resources Status Menu
³
To view free resources for STM-1/OC-3:
•
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Navigate to Main Menu> Monitoring > Physical Layer > SDH/SONET > Free
Resources.
Monitoring Performance
6-11
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and Operation Manual
The SDH/SONET Free Resources menu appears as illustrated in
Figure 6-19.
Egate-100
Monitoring> Physical Layer> SDH/SONET> Free Resources
Physical
Mapping
1
TUG3-1/TUG2-1/VC12-1
2
TUG3-2/TUG2-1/VC12-1
| 3
TUG3-3/TUG2-1/VC12-1
| 4
TUG3-1/TUG2-2/VC12-1
v 5
TUG3-2/TUG2-2/VC12-1
6
TUG3-3/TUG2-2/VC12-1
Frame Type
Unframed
Unframed
Unframed
Unframed
Unframed
Unframed
Free Timeslot
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; D-down; ^G-start
Figure 6-19. SDH/SONET Free Resources Menu
Viewing Channelized T3 Status
³
To view channelized T3 status:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > Physical Layer > T3 > Status.
The Channelized T3 status menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-20.
Egate-100
Monitoring> Physical Layer> T3> Status
Connector Type
Administrative Status
Operation Status
Alarms
1. Port[1 - 3]
>
>
>
>
...
(BNC)
(Up)
(Up)
(Unmasked)
(1)
>
Please select item <1 to 1>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
Figure 6-20. Channelized-T3 Port Status
2. Specify the Port for which you wish to view status information.
The port status menu includes the following information relating to the
specified port:
6-12
•
Administrative Status – activation of the link (Up or Down) via configuration
•
Operation Status –current operational status of the link, Up or Down for a
port in use, or Not Present for an unused port.
•
Alarms – Masked or Unmasked.
Monitoring Performance
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Viewing Gigabit Ethernet Status
³
To view Gigabit Ethernet status:
•
Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > Physical Layer > Ethernet > Status and
set Port to GbE-1.
The Gigabit Ethernet port information appears on the Ethernet Status
menu as illustrated in Figure 6-21.
Egate-100
Monitoring> Physical Layer> Ethernet> Status
Connector Type
Administrative Status
Operation Status
Alarms
1. Port
>
>
>
>
>
(RJ45)
(Up)
(Down)
(Unmasked)
(GbE-1)
>
Please select item <1 to 1>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-21. Gigabit Ethernet Port Status
Viewing Logical Port Status
•
You can view status information for the logical ports, including the
logical-physical port mapping.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> Logical Layer
1. Statistics
2. Clear Statistics
3. View Logical Ports
>
[]
Please select item <1 to 3>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-22. Monitoring Logical Layer Menu
³
To view logical port status:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > Logical Layer.
2. Select View Logical Ports.
The View Logical Ports menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-23.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Monitoring Performance
6-13
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Monitoring> Logical Layer> View Logical Ports
Logical
|
v
Type
Physical Mode
1
HDLC
2
HDLC
3
HDLC
4
PPPoHDLC
5
PPPoHDLC
6
PPPoHDLC
7
PPPoHDLC
8
PPPoHDLC
9
PPPoHDLC
10 MLPPP
->>
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
N/A
Timeslots/PPP
CRC-4 Enable
CRC-4 Enable
CRC-4 Enable
Unframed
Unframed
Unframed
Unframed
Unframed
Unframed
N/A
1-31
1-31
1-31
All
All
All
All
All
All
4-9
Bind to
Log.status Phys.status
Bridge 3
Bridge 4
Bridge 5
Logical 10
Logical 10
Logical 10
Logical 10
Logical 10
Logical 10
Bridge 6
N/A
N/A
N/A
LCP
LCP
LCP
LCP
LCP
LCP
BCP
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
Up
N/A
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
Figure 6-23. View Logical Ports Menu
The columns in the table include the following:
•
•
•
³
Bind to, representing one of two cases:
ƒ
Where the logical port is not part of an MLPPP bundle: the bridge port to
which the logical port is bound
ƒ
Where the logical port is part of a bundle: the MLPPP logical port.
Logical Status, applicable only for logical port of type of PPPoHDLC or MLPPP:
ƒ
For PPPoHDLC the status is LCP Up or LCP Down
ƒ
For MLPPP the status is BCP Up or BCP Down.
ƒ
For GFP the status is GFP In Sync or GFP Out of Sync.
Physical Status, where Up indicates that there is no failure on the physical
port (E1/T1) or above this layer in the hierarchy.
To view the parameters of a specific logical port:
•
In the Logical Ports menu, type M anywhere in the row representing a port.
The entry is displayed as a menu containing the logical parameters of the
specific port.
Viewing OAM Status
You can view remote terminal information for OAM.
³
To view OAM status:
3. Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > Application > Link(802.3ah) > Status.
The OAM Status menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-25
6-14
Monitoring Performance
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Egate-100
Main Menu>Monitoring>Application>Link(802.3ah)
1. Status
>
2. Remote Information
[]
>
Please select item <2 to 3>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-24. OAM Monitoring Menu
Egate-100
Main Menu>Monitoring>Application>Link(802.3ah)>Status
1.
Bridge Port Number [1-126]
Bridge Port Name
>
>
(1)
(Bridge 1)
Local Discovery State
Loopback State
Remote Revision
Remote MAC Address
Remote Vendor
Remote Port Name
>
>
>
...
...
...
(Operational)
(Off)
(0)
0020D225224C
(RAD)
(RicPort 1)
Remote Capabilities:
PDU Size …
Vars Retrieval
Link Events
Loopback >
Unidirectional
OAM mode >
...
>
>
>
>
>
(1500)
(Supported)
(Supported)
(Supported)
(Supported)
(Active)
Please select item <2 to 3>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-25. OAM Status Menu
³
To view remote terminal information:
1. : Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > Application > Link(802.3ah).
The OAM Monitoring menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-24.
2. Select Remote Terminal and set to Enable to enable view OAM remote
information.
3. Select Bridge Port For Remote Terminal and set to the bridge port to be used.
4. Select Remote Information.
The OAM Remote Information menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-25
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Monitoring Performance
6-15
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Main Menu>Monitoring>Application>Link(802.3ah)>Remote Information
Bridge
Port
1
2
3
BP Name
Loc Discovery
State
Operational
Operational
Operational
Tel-aviv
Jerusalem
Haifa
>
M-Menu
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-26. OAM Remote Information Menu
Viewing Bridge Status
You can access the following information for bridge monitoring from the Bridge
Monitoring menu as illustrated in Figure 6-42:
•
MAC Table
•
Mapping of VLAN to bridge port and bridge port to VLAN
•
Bridge port configuration settings.
This menu also allows you to clear all accumulated bridge statistics.
Egate-100
Main Menu>Monitoring>Application>Bridge
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
MAC Table
View VLAN ID to Bridge Ports
View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
Statistics
Clear Statistics
View Bridge Ports
>
[]
[]
>
> []
Please select item <1 to 5>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-27. Bridge Monitoring Menu
Viewing the MAC Table
³
To view the MAC table:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > Bridge.
2. Select MAC Table.
The MAC Table menu appears with the size of the table (MAC Table
Entries) displayed.
6-16
Monitoring Performance
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> Bridge> MAC Table
1.
2.
3.
4.
MAC Table Entries
VLAN Number[0 - 4094]
MAC Address
Bridge Port Number[0 - 128]
View MAC Table
...
...
...
...
[]
(1)
(2)
(00-00-00-00-00-00)
(44)
Please select item <1 to 4>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-28. MAC Table Menu
3. Create a filter to specify the subset of MAC table entries you wish to view, or
skip this step to view the entire table:
ƒ
VLAN Number (for an aware-mode bridge only) – Specify a VLAN ID, a
range (for example, 2-5), or 0 for all VLANs.
ƒ
MAC Address – Specify a MAC address, or 00’s for all MAC addresses.
ƒ
Bridge Port Number – A bridge port number or a range (for example 310), or 0 for all bridge ports.
4. Select View MAC Table.
The View MAC Table menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-29.
ƒ
To move to the top of the table, type <Ctrl+G>.
ƒ
To scroll down, type <Ctrl+D>.
Egate-100
Monitoring> Bridge> MAC Table> View MAC Table
|
v
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
MAC address
00-03-47-17-0C-C7
00-03-47-48-70-94
00-0A-F4-62-44-80
00-0D-65-AD-51-07
00-11-11-0F-2C-0A
00-20-D2-16-7F-B5
00-20-D2-21-C6-00
00-20-D2-22-BD-5F
00-60-E0-03-4A-FE
00-90-27-1A-2E-F5
Bridge port
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
3
3
3
Status
Dynamic
Dynamic
Dynamic
Dynamic
Dynamic
Dynamic
Static
Dynamic
Dynamic
Dynamic
C - Clear All
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ^D-down; ^G-start
Figure 6-29. View MAC Table Menu
The MAC Table menu includes the following information:
•
MAC Address – MAC address of incoming frame
•
VLAN ID (for an aware-mode bridge only)
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Monitoring Performance
6-17
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
³
Installation and Operation Manual
•
Bridge Port – Bridge port paired with the MAC address
•
Status – Static or dynamic entry.
To clear the MAC Table:
•
From the View MAC Table menu, type C.
Viewing the Mapping between VLANs and Bridge Ports
³
To view the mapping of VLAN IDs to Bridge Ports:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > Bridge.
2. Select View VLAN ID to Bridge Ports.
The VLAN ID to Bridge Ports menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-30.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> Bridge> View VLAN ID to Bridge Ports
VLAN ID Egress Transparent Ports
1
1
1-2
2
2
1-2
|
3
3
1-2
v
4
4
1-2
5
5
1-2
6
6
1-2
7
7
1-2
8
8
1-2
9
9
1-2
10
10
1-2
->>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
Figure 6-30. VLAN ID to Bridge Ports
³
To view the mapping of Bridge Ports to VLAN IDs:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > Bridge.
2. Select View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID.
The Bridge Ports to VLAN ID menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-31.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> Bridge> View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
E-Port VLAN ID
1
1
1-10,12-13
2
2
1-10,12-13
->>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
Figure 6-31. Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
6-18
Monitoring Performance
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Viewing Bridge Port Configuration Settings
³
To view bridge port configuration settings:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > Bridge.
2. Select View Bridge Ports.
The View Bridge Ports menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-32.
Egate-100
Monitoring> Bridge> View Bridge Ports
Bridge
1
2
3
Name
Bridge Port 1
Bridge Port 2
Bridge Port 3
Bind to
Host
GIGA
Logical 1
Physical Port
N/A
N/A
Physical 1
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 6-32. VLAN ID to Bridge Ports
³
To view information for a specific bridge port:
•
Highlight a bridge port in the Bridge or Name column and type M.
The parameters and corresponding values for the selected bridge port
appear as illustrated in Figure 6-33.
Egate-100
Monitoring> Bridge> View Bridge Ports
Bridge[1 – 130]
Name
Administrative status
>
Ingress filtering
>
Accept Frame Types
>
Port VID[1 – 4094]
>
Default Priority Tag[0 – 7]
>
Egress Tag Handling
>
Ingress Tag Handling
>
VLAN ID
Loop Detection
>
Maximum MAC Address[1 – 64000]
(6)
(Bridge Port 6)
(Up)
(Enable)
(Tag Only)
(1)
(1))
(None)
(None)
(3)
(Disable)
(64000)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 6-33. Bridge Configuration
³
To view the logical port configuration:
•
Highlight a bridge port in the Bind To column and type M.
The logical port parameters appear as illustrated in Figure 6-34.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Monitoring Performance
6-19
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Monitoring> Bridge> View Bridge Ports
Bind to
Protocol Type
Physical Port
Active Timeslots
(Logical 3))
(HDLC)
(Physical 3)
(1-24)
>
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit;
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 6-34. Logical Port Configuration
³
To view the physical port configuration:
•
Highlight a bridge port in the Physical Port column and type M.
The physical port parameters appear as illustrated in Figure 6-35.
Egate-100
Monitoring> Bridge> View Bridge Ports
Administrative Status
Frame Type
>
>
(Up)
(ESF)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit;
1 M/ 1 C
Figure 6-35. Physical Port Configuration
Viewing Ethernet Statistics
You can display statistical data for the Ethernet links.
³
To display Ethernet statistics:
•
Navigate to Monitoring > Application> Ethernet > Statistics.
The Ethernet Statistics menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-36.
6-20
Monitoring Performance
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Egate-100
Monitoring>Application>Ethernet>Statistics
Rx Correct Frames
Rx Correct Octets
Rx Bits/Sec
Rx FCS Errors
Rx Broadcast
Rx Multicast
Tx Correct Frames
Tx Correct Octets
Tx Bits/Sec
Tx Broadcast
Tx Multicast
Rx Frames
Rx Bytes …
Tx Frames
Tx Bytes …
Errors Count
Collision Count
1. Port Number
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(Gbe-1)
Please select item from 1 to 1
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
Figure 6-36. Ethernet Statistics Menu
Viewing Logical Layer Statistics
You can monitor the logical layer as follows:
•
Display statistical data for the logical layer
•
Clear statistical data for all logical ports.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> Logical Layer
1. Statistics
2. Clear Statistics
3. View Logical Ports
>
[]
Please select item <1 to 3>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-37. Monitoring Logical Layer Menu
³
To display logical layer statistics:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > Logical Layer.
2. Select Statistics.
The Logical Layer Statistics menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-38 to
Figure 6-41.
3. Select Port number and enter a port number between 1 and 126.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Monitoring Performance
6-21
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and Operation Manual
Relevant statistics, depending on protocol type for the specified port, are
displayed. See Table 6-5 for descriptions.
4. To switch to the next or the previous logical port, press <F> or <B>
respectively.
5. To clear the statistics for this port, press <C>.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> Logical Layer> Statistics
Type
HDLC
Rx HDLC FCS
Rx HDLC Abort
1. Port number[1 - 126]
... (0)
... (0)
... (1)
Please select item <1 to 1>
F - Next port; C – Clear
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-38. Logical Layer Statistics Menu (HDLC)
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> Logical Layer> Statistics
Type
Rx HDLC FCS
Rx HDLC Abort
PPP TX Fragments
PPP RX Fragments
1. Port number
PPPoHDLC
... (0)
... (0)
... (0)
... (0)
... (1)
Please select item <1 to 1>
F - Next port; C – Clear
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-39. Logical Layer Statistics Menu (PPP over HDLC)
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> Logical Layer> Statistics
Type
MLPPP
MP Rx Overflow Event
1. Port number
... (0)
... (1)
Please select item <1 to 1>
F - Next port; C – Clear
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-40. Logical Layer Statistics Menu (MLPPP)
6-22
Monitoring Performance
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> Logical Layer> Statistics
Type
Link State
Rx Data Type Not Valid
RX Single Error Corrected
Rx tHEC Multi Error
Rx eHEC Multi Error
Rx CRC 32 Error
1. Port number [1-126]
>
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
(GFP)
(Out Of Sync)
(0)
(0)
(0)
(3)
(0)
(4)
>
Please select item <1 to 1>
F - Next port; B – Previous port; C – Clear
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-41. Logical Layer Statistics Menu (GFP)
Table 6-5. Logical-layer Statistics Parameters
Parameter
Description
Rx HDLC FCS
The number of received HDLC frames with HDLC FCS errors
Rx HDLC Abort
The number of received HDLC frames with HDLC Abort indication
PPP TX
Fragments
The number of MLPPP fragments transmitted over the specified logical link. (The size of
the fragment package is based on the configured MTU.)
PPP RX
Fragments
The number of received MLPPP fragments packages on the specified logical link. (The size
of the fragmented package is based on the remote device MTU.)
MP Rx Overflow
Event
The number of MLPPP sequence-number overflow events at the receiver. This
indicates that the receiver cannot resequence and assemble the received frames because
of excessive loss of frames at the E1/T1 links or a large delay at one of the links ( larger
than the device’s maximum compensation delay of 16ms)
Link state
This status has two modes:
In_Sync: the RX GFP frame delineation process is in sync state
Out_of_sync: the RX GFP frame delineation process is in out of sync state.
Rx GFP Data
Type Not Valid
This counter is incremented on every packet arriving to a GFP machine with a GFP type
different from Ethernet Over GFP
Rx Single Bit
Error Corrected
This counter increments on every frame in which the GFP machine detected a single-bit
error in one of the following fields of the GFP headers: Chec, Thec or Ehec
The statistics does not distinguish among the different types.
RX_THEC_MULTI
_ERROR
This counter increments on every frame in which the GFP machine detected an error in
more than one bit of the THEC header
RX_EHEC_MULTI
_ERROR
This counter increments on every frame in which the GFP machine detected an error in
more than one bit of the EHEC header
RX_CRC32_ERRO
R
This counter increments on every frame in which the GFP machine detected an error in
the Ethernet CRC or the PFCS (if the GFP frame contains a PFCS)
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Monitoring Performance
6-23
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and Operation Manual
Viewing Bridge Statistics
You can access bridge statistics from the Bridge Monitoring menu as illustrated in
Figure 6-42. This menu also allows you to clear all accumulated bridge statistics.
Egate-100
Main Menu>Monitoring>Application>Bridge
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
MAC Table
View VLAN ID to Bridge Ports
View Bridge Ports to VLAN ID
Statistics
Clear Statistics
View Bridge Ports
>
[]
[]
>
> []
Please select item <1 to 5>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-42. Bridge Monitoring Menu
³
To view bridge statistics:
1. Navigate to Main Menu> Monitoring> Bridge.
2. Select Statistics.
The Bridge Statistics menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-43.
ƒ
³
To switch to the next port or the previous port, type F or B respectively.
To view the parameters of a specific bridge port:
•
In the Bridge Monitoring menu, press <M> anywhere in the row representing
a bridge port.
The entry is displayed as a menu containing the physical and logical
parameters of the specific bridge port.
³
To clear bridge statistics:
1. Following the previous procedure, select a port for which to view bridge
statistics.
2. Press <C> to clear statistics for the selected bridge port.
6-24
Monitoring Performance
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> Bridge> Statistics
Bind To
Rx Correct Frames
Rx Correct Octets
Rx FCS Errors
Tx Correct Frames
Tx Correct Octets
Tx Drop
1. Port Number[2 - 128]
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
(GbE)
(543)
(36969)
(0)
(210)
(14686)
(0)
(3)
Please select item <1 to 1>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-43. Bridge Statistics Menu
Table 6-6. Bridge Statistics Parameters
Parameter
Description
Rx Correct
Frames
The total number of correct frames received
Rx Correct Octets
The total number of octets (bytes) received
Rx FCS Errors
Total number of frames received with a valid length, but with invalid FCS and an integral
number of octets (not applicable for logical ports)
Tx Correct
Frames
The number of frames successfully transmitted
Tx Correct Octets
The number of octets successfully transmitted
Tx Drop
The number of congested dropped frames.
Viewing Radius Statistics
³
To display Radius statistics:
•
Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > System > Radius Statistics.
The Radius Statistics menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-44.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Monitoring Performance
6-25
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Monitoring>System>Radius Statistics
Server1 Server2 Server3
Access Requests
0
0
0
Access Retransmits
0
0
0
Access Accepts
0
0
0
Access Rejects
0
0
0
Access Challenges
0
0
0
Malformed Response
0
0
0
Bad Authenticators
0
0
0
Pending Requests
0
0
0
Timeouts
0
0
0
Unknown Types
0
0
0
Packets Dropped
0
0
0
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ?-help
Server4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Figure 6-44. Radius Statistics Menu
6.2
Handling Alarms and Traps
Egate-100 maintains a cyclic event log file that stores up to 2000 events. All
stored events are time-stamped. The event log file contents may be viewed on
the ASCII terminal or a Network Management Station (NMS). The event view it
may be cleared at any time.
To detect and resolve faults/errors, choose one of the following options:
•
Check for active alarms. For instructions, refer to Displaying Alarms.
•
Review the events recorded in the event log. For instructions, refer to
Displaying Alarms.
•
. For the complete list of possible events, refer to Table 6-7.
•
Perform external and internal loopback tests, such as ATM port timed external
loop (towards the line) or ATM port timed internal loop (towards the ATM
link).
•
Perform cell tests, in which a predefined cell is sent towards the ATM link.
•
Review the troubleshooting chart based on LED indications or other inputs. A
troubleshooting chart is available in Table 6-12.
Refer to Table 6-7 for the list of system events that can appear in the event log.
Table 6-7. Event List
Code
Event
Description
30
SW download to main started
Start software download main version
31
SW download to main ended
Software download to main version ended successfully
32
SW download to main failed
Software download to main version failed
33
SW download to backup started
Start software download backup version
6-26
Handling Alarms and Traps
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Code
Event
Description
34
SW download to backup ended
Software download to backup version ended successfully
35
SW download to backup failed
Software download to backup version failed
36
SW upload from main started
Start upload main version
37
SW upload from main ended
Software upload from main version ended successfully
38
SW upload from main failed
Software upload from main version failed
39
SW upload from backup started
Start upload backup version
40
SW upload from backup ended
Software upload from backup version ended successfully
41
SW upload from backup failed
Software upload from backup version failed
42
Configuration download started
Start configuration download
43
Configuration download ended
Configuration download ended successfully
44
Configuration download failed
Configuration download failed
45
Configuration upload started
Start configuration upload
46
Configuration upload ended
Configuration upload ended successfully
47
Configuration upload failed
Configuration upload failed
48
Local login
Attempt to login to the device
49
Invalid login
Attempt to login with invalid user name or password
50
Restart
Device powered up
52
Excessive SN error
Invalid MLPPP sequence number
Alarms and events are triggered from a variety of sources. Table 6-8 and
Table 6-9 summarize the sources of Egate-100 alarms and events.
Table 6-8. Sources for Alarms and Events (SDH/SONET)
Alarm/Event
Source
Description
DEVICE
System alarms and events
P1 SDH
SDH/SONET port 1 alarms
P2 SDH
SDH/SONET port 2 alarms
P1 SOH
SDH/SONET port 1 SOH-level alarms
P2 SOH
SDH/SONET port 2 SOH-level alarms
P1 HVC
P1 HVC 1.. 3
SDH port 1 HVC-level alarms
SONET port 1 HVC 1-3 level alarms
P2 HVC
P2 HVC 1.. 3
SDH port 2 HVC-level alarms
SONET port 2 HVC 1-3 level alarms
LVC 1..63
LVC 1..84
SDH LVC 1-63 level alarms
SONET LVC 1-63 level alarms
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Handling Alarms and Traps
6-27
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Alarm/Event
Source
Description
CH 1..63(84)
E1-/T1-level alarms (63 for SDH / 84 for SONET)
P1 GIGA
1GBE port 1 alarms
P2 GIGA
1GBE port 2 alarms
Logical 1.. 126
Logical-level alarms
Bridge 1.. 130
Bridge port-level alarms
EVENT
Non-alarm events
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 6-9. Sources for Alarms and Events (T3)
Alarm/Event
Source
Description
DEVICE
System alarms and events
P1 SDH
SDH/SONET port 1 alarms
P2 SDH
SDH/SONET port 2 alarms
P1 SOH
SDH/SONET port 1 SOH-level alarms
P2 SOH
SDH/SONET port 2 SOH-level alarms
P1 HVC
P1 HVC 1.. 3
SDH port 1 HVC-level alarms
SONET port 1 HVC 1-3 level alarms
P2 HVC
P2 HVC 1.. 3
SDH port 2 HVC-level alarms
SONET port 2 HVC 1-3 level alarms
LVC 1..63
LVC 1..84
SDH LVC 1-63 level alarms
SONET LVC 1-63 level alarms
CH 1..63(84)
E1-/T1-level alarms (63 for SDH / 84 for SONET)
P1 GIGA
1GBE port 1 alarms
P2 GIGA
1GBE port 2 alarms
Logical 1.. 126
Logical-level alarms
Bridge 1.. 130
Bridge port-level alarms
EVENT
Non-alarm events
6-28
Handling Alarms and Traps
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Refer to Table 6-10 for the list of traps sent by Egate-100.
Table 6-10. Trap List
Trap
Description
OID
coldStart
The unit has been restarted
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1
authenticationFailure
User authentication has failed
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5
linkDown
Interface has been disconnected
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3
linkUp
Interface has been connected
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4
ApsEventSwitchover
SDH/SONET APS switchover has occurred
1.3.6.1.2.1.10.49.2.0.1
successfulLogin
Successful login occurred
1.3.6.1.4.1.164.6.1.0.24
failedLogin
Failed login occurred
1.3.6.1.4.1.164.6.1.0.25
licenseUpdateTrap
License was updated
1.3.6.1.4.1.164.6.1.0.27
agnPowerFailureTrap
Power failure occurred
1.3.6.1.4.1.164.6.1.0.13
agnStatusChangeTrap
The device status has changed
1.3.6.1.4.1.164.6.1.0.2
tftpStatusChangeTrap
TFTP operation has successfully completed or has
failed
1.3.6.1.4.1.164.6.1.0.1
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Handling Alarms and Traps
6-29
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and Operation Manual
Displaying Events
Egate-100 maintains a log file that can hold up to 5000 system messages. All
events are time-stamped.
³
To access the event log:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Monitoring > System > Event Log.
The Event Log menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-45.
2. In the Event Log menu, use filtering if you wish to limit the view to a subset
of events:
ƒ
Source – All sources or a specific source as listed in Table 6-8 and
Table 6-9.
ƒ
LVC Number, when the selected source is LVC
Channel Number, when the selected source is CH
ƒ
From Event and To Event, to specify a range of log file entries.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> System> Event Log
1.
2.
3.
4.
Number Of Events
Source
From Event[1 - 5000]
To Event[2 - 5000]
View Event Log
(5000)
>
(All)
... (1)
... (5000)
[]
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-45. Event Log Menu
Egate-100
Monitoring> System> Event Log
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Number Of Events
Source
LVC Number [1 - 63]
From Event[1 - 5000]
To Event[2 - 5000]
View Event Log
>
...
...
...
[]
(2434)
(LVC)
(1)
(1)
(5000)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-46. Event Log Menu – LVC
6-30
Handling Alarms and Traps
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Egate-100
Monitoring> System> Event Log
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Number Of Events
Source
Channel Number [1 - 63]
From Event[1 - 5000]
To Event[2 - 5000]
View Event Log
>
...
...
...
[]
(2434)
(LVC)
(1)
(1)
(5000)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-47. Event Log Menu – Channel
Egate-100
Monitoring> System> Event Log> Source (All)
1. DEVICE
2. P1 SDH
3. P2 SDH
4. P1 SOH
5. P2 SOH
6. P1 HVC
7. P2 HVC
8. LVC
9. CH
10. P1 GIGA
11. P2 GIGA
12. LOGICAL
13. BRIDGE
14. EVENT
15. All
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-48. Event Log Source Menu (SDH/SONET)
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Handling Alarms and Traps
6-31
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100
Monitoring> System> Event Log> Source (All)
1. DEVICE
…
…
10. P2 GIGA
11. P1 GIGA
12. LOGICAL
13. BRIDGE
14. EVENT
15. All
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-49. Event Log Source Menu (T3)
3. Select View Event Log.
The View Event Log menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-50.
4. Type <Ctrl+G> to go to the top of the table, and use <Ctrl+D> to move down
in the event list.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> System> Event Log> View Event Log
|
v
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Source
1GbE-1
P1 SOH
1GbE-1
CH-63
CH-60
CH-57
CH-54
CH-51
CH-48
CH-45
Alarm
Link integrity fail
SD
Link integrity fail
AIS
AIS
AIS
AIS
AIS
AIS
AIS
Status
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Date
2005-04-13
2005-04-13
2005-04-13
2005-04-13
2005-04-13
2005-04-13
2005-04-13
2005-04-13
2005-04-13
2005-04-13
Time
07:22:58
06:54:10
06:54:05
06:54:05
06:54:05
06:54:05
06:54:05
06:54:05
06:54:05
06:54:05
C - Clear All
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ^D-down; ^G-start
Figure 6-50. View Event Log Menu
Clearing Events
Egate-100 allows you to clear the event log file of all events.
³
To clear the event log
•
6-32
In the Event Log menu, press <C>.
Handling Alarms and Traps
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Displaying Alarms
³
To access the active alarms list:
1. Navigate to Main Menu>Monitoring>System>Active Alarms.
The Active Alarms menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-51.
2. Type <Ctrl+G> to go to the top of the list, and <Ctrl+D> to move down in the
list.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Monitoring> System> Active Alarms
|
v
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Source
P2 SOH
CH-2
CH-3
CH-4
CH-5
CH-6
CH-7
CH-8
CH-9
CH-10
Description
LOS
AIS
AIS
AIS
AIS
AIS
AIS
AIS
AIS
AIS
Status
Unmasked
Unmasked
Unmasked
Unmasked
Unmasked
Unmasked
Unmasked
Unmasked
Unmasked
Unmasked
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; ^D-down; ^G-start
Figure 6-51. Active Alarms Menu
Table 6-11 lists the alarm types that appear in the active alarms menu:
Table 6-11. Active Alarms List
Code
Alarm
Description
3
Self test failure
Error detected in the device HW component
4
PS1 failure
No voltage in PS1
5
PS2 failure
No voltage on PS2
6
Fan1 failure
Failure detected in FAN 1
7
Fan2 failure
Failure detected in FAN 2
12
Master clock failure
Master clock failed. Applicable when Master clock is set to
Rx clock
13
Fallback clock failure
Fallback clock failed. Applicable when Fallback clock is set to
Rx clock
14
PS Type Mismatch
The power supplies are not of the same type (must be both
AC or both DC)
15
Unknown PS1
Power supply 1 not compliant
16
Unknown PS2
Power supply 2 not compliant
17
Link aggregation not available
Set of GbEs not recognized
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Handling Alarms and Traps
6-33
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and Operation Manual
Code
Alarm
Description
19
Fan3 failure
Fan too slow or failed
70
SFP Tx power over high level
SFP passed Tx threshold
71
SFP Rx power below low level
SFP passed Rx threshold
72
SFP shut down
SFP shutdown received
80
SOH LOS
Detecting loss of signal at SOH level
81
SOH LOF
Detecting loss of frame at SOH level
82
SOH AIS
Detecting line alarm indication signal at SOH level
83
SOH OOF
Detecting out of frame at SOH level
84
SOH EED
Detecting EED at SOH level
86
SOH RDI
Detecting line remote defect indication at SOH level
87
SOH SD
Detecting signal degrading at SOH level
100
HVC LOP
Loss of pointer on path level
101
HVC AIS
Detecting path alarm indication signal
102
HVC EED
Detecting path EED
104
HVC PLM
Detecting signal lable payload mismatch
105
HVC LOM
Detecting loss of multiframe
106
HVC RDI
Detecting remote defect indication at path level
107
HVC SD
Detecting signal degrading at path level
120
LVC LOP
Detecting loss of pointer at tributary level
121
LVC AIS
Detecting alarm indication signal at tributary level
122
LVC EED
Detecting EED at tributary level
124
LVC PLM
Detecting signal lable payload mismatch at tributary level
125
LVC RDI
Detecting remote defect indication at tributary level
126
LVC SD
Detecting signal degrading at tributary level
140
CH LOF
Detecting loss of frame on E1/T1
141
CH AIS
Detecting alarm indication signal on E1/T1
142
CH RDI
Detecting remote defect indication on E1/T1
143
CRC MF
Detecting multiframe (VCG) CRC
144
TSF
Detecting Trail Signal Fail on VCG
145
TSD
Detecting Trail Signal Degrading on VCG
146
dLOM
Detecting loss of multiframe (VCG)
147
Loop detected
Detecting loop on VCG
6-34
Handling Alarms and Traps
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Code
Alarm
Description
148
dMND
Detecting Member Non-skewable alarm: delay on member
of VCG is larger than can be compensated
160
1GBE Link integrity fail
Fail in 1GBE port integrity
161
SFP Tx power over high level
SFP passed Tx threshold
162
SFP Rx power below low level
SFP passed Rx threshold
163
SFP shut down
SFP shutdown received
200
Loop detected
E1 bound to a port is looped
201
No match to bundle
Links not connected to the correct bundle
202
LCP fail
PPP logical port link-control-protocol layer was not
established
203
BCP fail
MLPPP logical port Bridge-control-protocol layer was not
established
240
Link OAM fail
OAM link has failed
241
Remote Link fail
Link to remote OAM device has failed
242
Remote critical event
Critical event was received from OAM remote device
243
Remote dying gasp
Dying gasp was received from OAM remote device
Masking Alarms
³
To mask/unmask system alarms:
1. Navigate to Main Menu > Configuration > System > Alarms.
The Alarms configuration menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-52.
2. Select Alarms and then select Masked or Unmasked as desired.
You are prompted to confirm your request.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Configuration> System> Alarms
1. Alarms
> (Unmasked)
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-52. Alarm Configuration Menu
6.3
Testing Egate-100
Egate-100 allows you to check network integrity by running ping and PRBS tests
and displaying self-test results.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Testing Egate-100
6-35
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
³
Installation and Operation Manual
To access test results:
Navigate to Main Menu > Diagnostics.
The Diagnostics menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-53.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Diagnostics
1. PING
2. PRBS
3. Self test result
>
>
>
Please select item <1 to 3>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-53. Diagnostics Menu
Running Ping Test
You can ping the remote IP host to check Egate-100 IP connectivity.
³
To ping an IP host:
1. Navigate to Main menu > Diagnostics > Ping.
The Ping menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-54.
2. From the Ping menu, configure the following:
ƒ
Remote IP address – IP address of the host that you intend to ping,
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255).
ƒ
Number of packets to send – Select 0 to send a continuous stream of
packets, or 1-50 to send a specified number of packets.
ƒ
Packet Length – Select a value between 64 and 1450.
ƒ
Delay Between Packets – Select a delay in seconds.
ƒ
Packets Receive Timeout – Select a limit before timeout in seconds.
3. Select Send Ping and set it to On to start sending pings.
4. Select Send Ping and set it to Off to stop the ping test.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Diagnostics> PING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Packets Success Count
Packets Failure Count
Remote IP Address
Number of Packets to Send
Packet Length [64 - 1450]
Delay Between Packets (sec)
Packets Receive Timeout (sec)
Send Ping
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
>
(0)
(0)
(123.12.123.111)
(0)
(64)
(1)
(5)
(Off)
Please select item <1 to 6>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-54. Ping Menu
6-36
Testing Egate-100
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Running PRBS Test
You can check the quality of the physical E1/T1 line between Egate-100 and a
remote end customer-premises device (for example, RICi-E1/T1) by running a
PRBS test.
The selected PRBS pattern should be looped by the remote device and analyzed
upon return to Egate-100. The line quality is determined based on the level of
errors detected in the received stream.
³
To run a PRBS test:
1. Navigate to Main menu > Diagnostics > PRBS
The PRBS menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-55.
2. From the PRBS menu, configure the following:
ƒ
ƒ
Port Number – Number of the port whose line you wish to test: 1 to 64
for E1 and 1 to 84 for T1.
Pattern – Select 2^11-1, 2^15-1 or QRSS.
3. Select Send Prbs and set it to On to start sending the pattern.
The Sync State and the Bit Error Count are displayed.
4. Select Insert Error to insert a single Bit Error into the generated pattern, and
then press <C> to reset the Bit Error counter.
5. Select Send Prbs and set it to Off to stop the test.
6. To switch to the next port or the previous port, type <F> or <B> respectively.
Egate-100
Main Menu> Diagnostics> PRBS
1. Port Number[1 - 84]
... (1)
2. Pattern
>
(2^11-1)
3. Send Prbs
>
(Off)
>
Please select item <1 to 3>
F - Forward Port; B - Backward Port
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit
Figure 6-55. PRBS Menu
Viewing Self Test Results
Egate-100 can display the results of self tests run when the unit is powered up.
³
To view self test results:
1. Navigate to Main menu > Diagnostics
The Diagnostics menu appears as illustrated in Figure 6-53.
2. Select Self Test Result.
If the test is successful, the message Successful is displayed. Possible
unsuccessful results are:
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Testing Egate-100
6-37
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
6-38
…
Host memory
…
Packet memory
…
Parameter memory
…
SDH/SONET framer
…
SDH/SONET mapper
…
TOD access
…
Logic access.
Testing Egate-100
Installation and Operation Manual
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
6.4
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
The following troubleshooting chart is based on LED indications or other inputs.
Use this chart to identify the cause of a problem that may arise during operation.
For detailed description of the LED indicators functions refer to Chapter 3.
To correct the reported problem, perform the suggested remedial actions. If a
problem cannot be resolved by performing the suggested actions, please contact
RAD technical support. For additional information, refer to Section 6.5.
Table 6-12. Troubleshooting Chart
Fault/Problem
Probable Cause
Remedial Actions
Egate-100 unit is “dead”
(POWER LED is off)
No power
•
Check that both ends of the power
cable are properly connected
•
Replace the power supply.
SYSTEM RDY LED
blinks
Self test failed
Navigate to the Self Test Result menu to
locate the failure and then send the unit
for repair. If the menu is not accessible,
send the unit for repair.
SDH/SONET SYNC
LED is off
SONET/SDH Rx
path failure
Check the fiber or cable and Rx levels, as
well as the remote unit Tx level.
SDH/SONET SYNC
LED blinks
SONET/SDH Tx
path failure
•
Check the Tx optical power to see
whether it is in range. If out of range,
send it for repair
•
Check the fiber optic connections.
T3 Rx path failure
•
Check/replace the cables
Problems with physical interfaces or
frame format definitions
•
Check Rx levels, as well as the remote
Tx level
•
Check T3 frame format definition in the
remote device and same definition in
E-gate (M23 or C-bit Parity).
•
Check remote equipment T3 interface
(replace cards/device).
•
Check Egate-100 (replace card/device).
Channelized T3 LED
is off
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Troubleshooting
6-39
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Installation and Operation Manual
Fault/Problem
Probable Cause
Remedial Actions
Ethernet LINK LED
is off
Ethernet cable problem
•
Check the Ethernet cable to see
whether a cross or straight cable is
needed
•
Check/replace Ethernet cable
•
Check range to be within limits
•
Check the port by connecting to a
different port switch at the remote end
•
Check autonegotiation settings for
autonegotiation mismatch
•
Send the device for repair.
Autonegotiation mismatch
6.5
Technical Support
Technical support for this product can be obtained from the local distributor from
whom it was purchased.
For further information, please contact the RAD distributor nearest you or one of
RAD's offices worldwide. This information can be found at www.rad.com (in the
Where to Buy > End Users page).
6-40
Technical Support
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Appendix A
Connector Wiring
This appendix specifies the Egate-100 electrical connector pinouts.
A.1
Ethernet Interface Connectors
10/100BaseT Connector
The 10/100BaseT Ethernet electrical interface terminates in an 8-pin RJ-45
connector, wired as specified in Table A-1.
Table A-1. 10/100BaseT Ethernet Connector Pinouts
Pin
Function
1
Tx+
2
Tx–
3
Rx+
4, 5
–
6
Rx–
7, 8
–
1000BaseTConnector
The Gigabit Ethernet electrical interface has an RJ-45, 8-pin connector.
Table A-2. Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 Connector Pinouts
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Pin
Function
1
BI_DA+
2
BI_DA–
3
BI_DB+
4
BI_DC+
5
BI_DC–
6
BI_DB–
7
BI_DD+
8
BB_DD–
Ethernet Interface Connectors
A-1
Appendix A Connector Wiring
A.2
Installation and Operation Manual
Control Connector
The control terminal interface terminates in a V.24/RS-232 9-pin D-type female
DCE connector. Table A-3 lists the control connector's pin assignments.
Table A-3. CONTROL Connector Pinout
A-2
Control Connector
Pin
Function
1
–
2
Receive Data (RD)
3
Transmit Data (TD)
4
–
5
Ground (GND)
6
–
7
–
8
–
9
–
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Appendix B
Boot Sequence and
Downloading Software
This appendix describes the Egate-100 boot procedure via an ASCII terminal for
downloading software.
The Egate-100 software is stored in flash memory in two sections: in the boot
sector and in the file system. The boot sector holds a boot program that calls up
the rest of the program from the file system.
The file system contains two compressed copies of the Egate-100 code. One
copy is called the operating file, and the other is called the backup file. The
operating file is the default-executable Egate-100 code. The backup file is used
whenever the operating file is absent or corrupted.
B.1
Booting Egate-100
Egate-100 boots up automatically. After powering up, no user intervention is
required, except when the user wishes to access the file system to modify or
update the Egate-100 application software.
Boot Sequence
The following is a description of the boot sequence. If the system is working
normally, the entire process is completed within two minutes.
•
The boot program searches for the operating file in the file system. If the file
exists, the program continues.
If the file does not exist, the boot program searches for the backup file. If the
backup file is found, it is used instead of the operating file and the boot
process continues.
If there is no backup file, you must download a file via the XMODEM protocol
or via TFTP. The received file is saved as the operating file in the file system.
•
Files in the file system are compressed and automatically decompressed into
the RAM before execution begins.
•
After decompression, the software starts to execute and you can begin
working.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Booting Egate-100
B-1
Appendix B Boot Sequence and Downloading Software
Installation and Operation Manual
Accessing Main Boot Menu
When Egate-100 is turned on, the first menu that appears is the Main Boot
menu.
RAD DATA COMMUNICATIONS
Boot software version E1.01 AUG 17 2005, 10:29:00
Press Ctrl-A to enter debug screen
Figure B-1. Main Boot Menu
If <Ctrl-A> is not typed, the boot proceeds as described in Boot Sequence on
page B-1.
If <Ctrl-A> is typed, the Boot Option menu appears.
BOOT WP 787-Rev-B1 - FILE MENU
1. File Download
2. File Utility
Select mode: 2
Figure B-2. Boot Option Menu
B.2
Downloading Files
In this mode the user is able to perform a download of a new application file. In
order to use this mode two conditions apply:
•
No application file was found
•
Option 1 was selected after <Ctrl-A> was typed.
To download an application file:
•
Select File Download in the Boot Option menu.
The Application File Not Found menu appears (see Figure B-3).
Downloading via XMODEM
To download an application file via XMODEM:
1. Select Xmodem Protocol in the Application File Not Found menu.
The Application File Not Found menu appears as illustrated in Figure B-3.
B-2
Downloading Files
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
Appendix B Boot Sequence and Downloading Software
BOOT WP 787-Rev-B1 - FILE MENU
1. File Download
2. File Utility
Application file was not found
Download application file using:
0. Exit
1. Xmodem Protocol
2. TFTP Protocol
Select one protocol: 1
Downloading application file using XMODEM (Y/N)
Figure B-3. Application File Not Found Menu
2. Type Y.
The XMODEM File Transfer menu appears and downloading begins.
Downloading via TFTP
The TFTP server must be connected to Egate-100 via the Ethernet-1 port.
To download an application file via TFTP:
1. Select TFTP Protocol in the Application File Not Found menu.
The TFTP Parameters Setting menu appears:
BOOT WP 787-Rev-B1 - TFTP PARAMETERS SETTING
FILE NAME:
HOST IP:
HOST MASK:
DEFAULT GATEWAY:
e-gate.img
172.17.140.123
255.255.255.0
172.17.140.1
TFTP IP SERVER:
192.168.238.173
Press S to start transferring the file (N to cancel).
Figure B-4. TFTP Parameters Setting Menu
2. Enter the file name, host IP, host mask, and default gateway information.
3. Type s.
The downloading begins. Once the downloading is completed, Egate-100
is reset automatically.
File Utility (Accessing the File Menu)
The File Menu is an option that allows the user to perform basic file transfer
operations. These operations are all optional.
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Downloading Files
B-3
Appendix B Boot Sequence and Downloading Software
Installation and Operation Manual
To access the File Menu:
•
Select File Utility in the Boot Option menu.
The File Menu appears:
RAD BOOT
FILE MENU
0. Reset the System
1. File swap: Operating backup
2. Delete Operating file (existing backup will be saved as
operating)
3. Delete Configuration file
4. Delete ALL file system (Software and Configuration files)
Select operating mode:
Figure B-5. File Menu
From the File menu, you can:
Caution
•
Exchange the operating and backup files
•
Delete the operating file. The backup file becomes the operating file
•
Delete all the configuration files
•
Format the file system.
Formatting the file system means deleting all files in the system, including the
software-operating main, backup and configuration files.
If you choose to exchange or delete a file, a confirmation message appears.
B-4
Downloading Files
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Appendix C
SDH/SONET Mapping
This appendix describes the SDH and SONET mapping, specifying the TU-G3,
TU-G2 and VT 1.5 numbering for the 63 ports of SDH (C.1) and the 84 ports of
SONET (C.2).
C.1
TU-xx Numbering System – SDH
TU#
TUG3
TUG2
VT 1.5
TU#
TUG3
TUG2
VT 1.5
TU#
TUG3
TUG2
VT 1.5
1
1
1
1
22
1
1
2
43
1
1
3
2
2
1
1
23
2
1
2
44
2
1
3
3
3
1
1
24
3
1
2
45
3
1
3
4
1
2
1
25
1
2
2
46
1
2
3
5
2
2
1
26
2
2
2
47
2
2
3
6
3
2
1
27
3
2
2
48
3
2
3
7
1
3
1
28
1
3
2
49
1
3
3
8
2
3
1
29
2
3
2
50
2
3
3
9
3
3
1
30
3
3
2
51
3
3
3
10
1
4
1
31
1
4
2
52
1
4
3
11
2
4
1
32
2
4
2
53
2
4
3
12
3
4
1
33
3
4
2
54
3
4
3
13
1
5
1
34
1
5
2
55
1
5
3
14
2
5
1
35
2
5
2
56
2
5
3
15
3
5
1
36
3
5
2
57
3
5
3
16
1
6
1
37
1
6
2
58
1
6
3
17
2
6
1
38
2
6
2
59
2
6
3
18
3
6
1
39
3
6
2
60
3
6
3
19
1
7
1
40
1
7
2
61
1
7
3
20
2
7
1
41
2
7
2
62
2
7
3
21
3
7
1
42
3
7
2
63
3
7
3
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
TU-xx Numbering System – SDH
C-1
Appendix C SDH/SONET Mapping
C.2
C-2
Installation and Operation Manual
TU-xx Numbering System – SONET
TU#
TUG3
TUG2
VT 1.5
TU#
TUG3
TUG2
VT 1.5
TU#
TUG3
TUG2
VT 1.5
1
1
1
1
29
2
1
1
57
3
1
1
2
1
2
1
30
2
2
1
58
3
2
1
3
1
3
1
31
2
3
1
59
3
3
1
4
1
4
1
32
2
4
1
60
3
4
1
5
1
5
1
33
2
5
1
61
3
5
1
6
1
6
1
34
2
6
1
62
3
6
1
7
1
7
1
35
2
7
1
63
3
7
1
8
1
1
2
36
2
1
2
64
3
1
2
9
1
2
2
37
2
2
2
65
3
2
2
10
1
3
2
38
2
3
2
66
3
3
2
11
1
4
2
39
2
4
2
67
3
4
2
12
1
5
2
40
2
5
2
68
3
5
2
13
1
6
2
41
2
6
2
69
3
6
2
14
1
7
2
42
2
7
2
70
3
7
2
15
1
1
3
43
2
1
3
71
3
1
3
16
1
2
3
44
2
2
3
72
3
2
3
17
1
3
3
45
2
3
3
73
3
3
3
18
1
4
3
46
2
4
3
74
3
4
3
19
1
5
3
47
2
5
3
75
3
5
3
20
1
6
3
48
2
6
3
76
3
6
3
21
1
7
3
49
2
7
3
77
3
7
3
22
1
1
4
50
2
1
4
78
3
1
4
23
1
2
4
51
2
2
4
79
3
2
4
24
1
3
4
52
2
3
4
80
3
3
4
25
1
4
4
53
2
4
4
81
3
4
4
26
1
5
4
54
2
5
4
82
3
5
4
27
1
6
4
55
2
6
4
83
3
6
4
28
1
7
4
56
2
7
4
84
3
7
4
TU-xx Numbering System – SONET
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Index
—1—
10/100BaseT Management Port, 1-29
—8—
802.3ah, 1-5
—A—
AC Power
Connecting, 2-6
active alarms list, 6-33
alarms, 6-33
configuration, 4-20
masking, 6-35
sources, 6-27
Application, 1-2
IP DSLAM and WiMAX backhauling, 5-14
VLANs, 5-1
WiMAX backhauling opposite RICi-4T1, 5-24
APS, 4-16
configuring, 4-15
monitoring, 6-5
status, viewing, 6-5
—B—
boot sequence
description, B-1
process, B-2
bridge, 1-5, 1-9
statistics, 6-19, 6-24
Bridge
monitoring, 6-16
parameters, 4-36
split horizon, 4-36
statistics, 6-24
bridge ports
configuring, 4-39
loop detection, 4-39
mapping to VLAN ID, 6-18
parameters, 4-40
buffer management, 1-22, 4-17
parameters, 4-18
—C—
Cables, 2-2
CBL-DB9F-DB9M-STR, 2-2
CBL-DB9F-DB9M-STR, 2-2
clock source
configuring, 4-13
Fallback clock, 4-14
Clock source
master clock, 4-14
Communities, 4-3
ConfiguRAD, 1-5, 3-6
choosing options, 3-8
navigating menus, 3-8
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Configuration
Radius, 4-11
configuring
1GbE port redundancy, 4-17
APS, 4-15
ASCII terminal, 3-5
bridge port, 4-39
clock source, 4-13
device information, 4-5
drop thresholds, 4-17
GbE aggregation, 4-17
Iinternal bridge, 4-35
IP host parameters, 4-2
logical port, 4-31
network managers, 4-10
physical ports, 4-20
QoS priorities, 4-44
redundancy, 4-15
reset to factory defaults, 4-52
SDH/SONET ports, 4-20
syslog, 4-19
system parameters, 4-2
VLAN membership, 4-41
Configuring
Physical Layer, 4-20
terminal data rate, 4-12
Connecting
Power, 2-6
Power, AC, 2-6
Power, DC, 2-7
Connector
10/100BaseT Interface, A-1
1000BaseT Interface, A-1
Fast Ethernet Interface, A-1
Gigabit Ethernet Interface, A-1
Connectors, 2-2
control port, 4-12
interface, 3-5
interface pinouts, A-2
Control session, 3-5
controls, 3-1
—D—
DC power
connecting, 2-7
DC Power
Connecting, 2-7
default configuration
customizing, 4-51
Default settings, 3-2
device information
configuring, 4-5
diagnostics, 6-1, 6-35
overview, 1-25
ping, 6-36
PRBS, 6-37
self test, 6-37
I-1
Index
downloading files, B-2
drop thresholds, 4-17
DSCP, 4-45
DSCP (QoS), 1-21
—E—
E1/T1
parameters, 4-22
timing, 1-21
encapsulation, 4-4
Equipment
cables, 2-2
connectors, 2-2
power cable, 2-2
Equipment Required, 2-2
Equipment Required, 2-2
Ethernet
access, 1-9
Ethernet link aggregation
monitoring, 6-5
status, viewing, 6-5
Ethernet port
configure, 4-29
event list, 6-26
event log, 6-30
clearing, 6-32
events
sources, 6-27
—F—
factory defaults, 4-52
customizing, 4-51
resetting to, 4-52
restoring, 4-52
Fast Ethernet
interface pinouts, A-1
Features, 1-3
File Menu
boot options, B-3
file transfer, 4-49
frame buffers, 4-17
front panel, 3-1
LEDs, 3-1
functional description, 1-7
—G—
GbE
interface pinouts, A-1
interface status, 6-13
GbE port
aggregation, 4-17
configure, 4-29
redundancy, 4-17
GFP, 1-15
configuring, 4-31
RX traffic, 1-17
Tx traffic, 1-15
Gigabit Ethernet
Interface status, 6-13
Status, 6-13
Grounding, 2-1
I-2
Installation and Operation Manual
—H—
HDLC, 1-19
Host
encapsulation, 4-4
VLAN, 4-4
Host IP
configuring, 4-2
host parameters, 4-3, 4-4
Host parameters
encapsulation, 4-5
Host tagging
tagged, 4-5
untagged, 4-5
hot keys, 3-10
Hot-swappable power supply
replacing, 2-7
HVC, 6-33
parameters, 4-24
—I—
indicators, 3-1
Installation, 2-1
Installation and Setup, 2-3
Channelized T3, 2-4
Gigabit Ethernet, 2-5
Management Stations, 2-5
NMS Station, 2-6
SDH/SONET, 2-4
SFPs, 2-3
Terminal, 2-5
interface
GbE, 1-8
Gigabit Ethernet, 1-8
STM-1/OC-3, 1-4
Interface
channelized T3, 1-8
channelized-T3, 1-4
GbE, 1-3
Gigabit Ethernet, 1-3
SDH/SONET, 1-7
interfaces
statistics, 6-21
internal bridge
configuring, 4-35
inventory, 4-48
IP precedence (QoS), 1-21
—L—
LEDs, 3-1
Link aggregation, 1-8
log file
events, 6-26
logical layer
configuring, 4-31
statistics, 6-21
status, 6-13
logical port
configuring, 4-31
Login
terminal, 3-6
Web browser, 3-7
Loop detection, 1-25
LVC, 6-33
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Installation and Operation Manual
parameters, 4-25
—M—
MAC table, 4-38
monitoring, 6-16
parameters, 4-38
main menu, 3-8
management
inband, 1-23
out-of-band, 1-23
via terminal port, 3-5
via Web browser, 3-6
Management
communities, 4-3
host VLAN, 4-4
IP parameters, 4-2
SNMP, 4-3
terminal control session, 3-5
Manager List, 4-10
menus
hot keys, 3-10
Menus
navigating, 3-8
MLPPP, 1-20
configuring, 4-31
features, 1-20
Protocols, 1-20
monitoring, 6-1
1GbE status, 6-13
bridge ports, 6-18
bridge statistics, 6-19, 6-24
Gigabit Ethernet status, 6-13
logical layer statistics, 6-21
logical layer status, 6-13
MAC table, 6-16
SDH/SONET status, 6-9
statistics, 6-21
T3 status, 6-12
VLAN ID, 6-18
Monitoring
Event Log Clearing, 6-32
Event Log Display, 6-30
free SDH/SONET resources, 6-12
OAM, 6-14
Mounting the Unit, 2-3
—O—
OAM
monitoring, 6-14
remote terminal information, 6-15
status, 6-14
operation, 3-1
—P—
package contents, 2-2
Package Contents, 2-2
password, 4-8
default, 3-6
obtaining new, 4-9
physical description
dimensions, 1-30
weight, 1-30
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Index
physical ports, 4-20
ping, 6-36
pinouts
control connector, A-2
Fast Ethernet, A-1
Gigabit Ethernet, A-1
Pop-ups
blocking, 3-7
Port
10/100BaseT Management, 1-29
Ports
GbE, 1-2
Gigabit Ethernet, 1-2
STM-1/OC-3, 1-2
T3, 1-2
Power
grounding, 2-1
power cable, 2-2
power supply
DC, 2-7
Power, AC
Connecting, 2-6
Power, DC
Connecting, 2-7
powering down, 3-16
Powering up, 3-1
PPP/BCP
Protocols, 1-20
PRBS test, 6-37
—Q—
QoS, 1-21, 4-44
broadcast, 4-47
multicast, 4-47
parameters, 4-45
priority classification, 4-44
traffic classes, 4-45
unknown unicast, 4-47
—R—
radius
parameters, 4-11
Radius
configuration, 4-11
statistics, 6-25
redundancy
configuring, 4-15
Redundancy
link aggregation, 1-8
resetting
device, 4-52
to factory defaults, 4-52
RS-232 port, 3-5
—S—
SDH
TU-xx Mapping, C-1
SDH/SONET
mapping, 4-26
SDH/SONET
E1/T1 parameters, 4-22
HVC parameters, 4-24
I-3
Index
LVC parameters, 4-25
port configuration, 4-20
SOH parameters, 4-24
SDH/SONET
interface status, 6-9
Security, 1-24
Security Protocols, 1-6
self test, 6-37
Setup, 2-1
SFP
installing, 2-3
removing, 2-4
site requirements, 2-1
Site Requirements and Prerequisites, 2-1
SNMP
communities, 4-3
software
new releases, 4-49
updates, 4-49
versions, 4-49
SOH, 6-33
parameters, 4-24
SONET
TU-xx Mapping, C-2
SONET mapping, 1-7
Split Horizon, 1-14
Static MAC table, 4-38
statistics
bridge, 6-19, 6-24
logical layer, 6-21
Statistics
Ethernet, 6-20
Logical Layer, 6-21
status
logical layer, 6-13
status
1GbE, 6-13
SDH/SONET, 6-9
Status
Gigabit Ethernet, 6-13
T3, 6-12
STM-1 mapping, 1-7
STM-1/OC-3
interface status, 6-9
syslog, 4-19
system
APS, 4-16
protection, 4-17
system parameters, 4-2
—T—
T3
channelized, 1-4, 1-8
Interface status, 6-12
Status, 6-12
technical specifications
bridge, 1-28
I-4
Installation and Operation Manual
indicators, 1-29
interfaces, 1-26
Technical specifications
power, 1-30
Technical support, 6-40
terminal, 3-5
baud rate, 4-12
configuring, 3-5
data rate, 4-12
Terminal
control session, 3-5
login, 3-6
parameters, 4-12
TFTP, 4-51
parameters, B-3
timing, 1-21
Traps
list of, 6-29
troubleshooting, 6-1, 6-39
—U—
user name, 4-8
user priority, 4-44
utilities
factory defaults, 4-52
reset device, 4-54
—V—
VLAN
host, 4-4
VLAN ID
mapping to bridge ports, 6-18
VLAN membership, 4-41
VLAN priority (QoS), 1-21, 1-22
VLAN-Aware mode, 1-9
Aging process, 1-12
bridge features, 1-9
Egress process, 1-12
Forwarding process, 1-12
Ingress process, 1-10
Learning process, 1-11
VLAN-Unaware mode, 1-13
Aging process, 1-13
bridge features, 1-13
Egress process, 1-14
Forwarding process, 1-14
Ingress process, 1-13
Learning process, 1-13
—W—
Web browser, 3-6
login, 3-7
—X—
X-Modem, 4-52
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
DC Power Supply Connection – AC/DC Adapter (AD) Plug
Note: Ignore this supplement if the unit is AC-powered.
Certain units are equipped with a Wide Range AC/DC power supply. These units
are equipped with a standard AC-type 3-prong power input connector located on
the unit rear panel. This power input connector can be used for both AC and DC
voltage inputs.
For DC operation, a compatible AC/DC Adapter (AD) plug for attaching to your
DC power supply lines is used (see Figure 1).
Connect the wires of your DC power supply cable to the AD plug, according to the
voltage polarity and assembly instructions provided below.
Figure 1
Caution: Prepare all connections to the AD plug before inserting it into the unit’s
power connector.
Preparing and Connecting the Power
Supply Cable with the AD Plug
1. Loosen the cover screw on the bottom of the AD plug to open it
(see Figure 2).
~100-240VAC/
AC/DC power
input connector
on unit
RETURN
2. Run your DC power supply cable through the removable cable
guard and through the open cable clamp.
3. Place each DC wire lead into the appropriate AD plug wire
terminal according to the voltage polarity mapping shown.
Afterwards, tighten the terminal screws close.
4. Fit the cable guard in its slot and then close the clamp over the
cable. Tighten the clamp screws to secure the cable.
5. Reassemble the two halves of the AD plug and tighten the cover
screw.
Bottom
of AD plug
Open
AD plug
(top view)
Cable
clamp
(closed)
Cable
guard
DC power
cable
Warning:
• Always connect a ground (earth) wire to the AD plug’s Chassis
(frame) Ground terminal. Connecting the unit without a protective
ground, or interruption of the grounding (for example, by using an
extension power cord without a grounding conductor) can cause
harm to the unit or to the equipment connected to it!
• The AD adapter is not intended for field wiring.
POWER
Wire
terminals
6. Connect the assembled power supply cable to the unit.
• Reversing the wire voltage polarity will not cause damage to the
unit, but the internal protection fuse will not function.
48/60VDC
Chassis
(frame)
Ground
+
Positive
pole
(Earthed)
DC power
source
Negative
pole
Figure 2
SUP-930-05/04
DC Power Supply Connection – Terminal Block Connector
Note: Ignore this supplement if the unit is
AC-powered.
Certain DC-powered units are equipped with a plastic 3-pin
VDC-IN power input connector, located on the unit rear panel.
Different variations of the connector are shown in Figure 1. All
are functionally identical.
Supplied with such units is a kit including a mating Terminal
Block (TB) type connector plug for attaching to your power
supply cable.
A
B
C
D
E
Connect the wires of your power supply cable to the TB plug,
according to the voltage polarity and assembly instructions
provided below.
Caution: Prepare all connections to the TB plug before
inserting it into the unit’s VDC-IN connector.
Preparing and Connecting the Power
Supply Cable with the TB Plug
Refer to Figure 2 for assistance.
1. Strip the insulation of your power supply wires
according to the dimensions shown.
2. Place each wire lead into the appropriate TB
plug terminal according to the voltage polarity
mapping shown in Figure 4. (If a terminal is
not already open, loosen its screw).
Afterwards, tighten close the three terminal
screws.
Figure 1. TB DC Input Connectors Types
Appearing on Unit Panels
Typical DC Power
Input Connector
Wire stripping
dimensions
20 mm
(on unit panel)
5 mm
Terminal screws
See following page
for wire mapping
3. Pull a nylon cable tie (supplied) around the
power supply cable to secure it firmly to the
TB plug grip, passing the tie through the holes
on the grip.
4. Isolate the exposed terminal screws/wire
leads using a plastic sleeve or insulating tape,
to prevent the possibility of short-circuit.
5. Connect the assembled power supply cable to
the unit by inserting the TB plug into the unit’s
VDC-IN connector until it snaps into place.
Nylon cable tie
TB plug grip
DC power
cable
Mating
TB Connector
Plug
Figure 2. TB Plug Assembly
SUP-220-03/03
Note: Certain TB plugs are equipped with captive
screws for securing the assembled cable’s
TB plug to the unit’s VDC-IN connector (C and
E types only). To secure the plug, tighten the two
screws on the plug into the corresponding holes
on the sides of the input connector as shown in
Figure 3.
Captive
screws
Figure 3. TB Plug with Captive Screws (optional)
DC Power Supply Wire Voltage Polarity
Refer to Figure 4 for proper mapping of the power supply
wire leads to the TB plug’s three terminals.
Warning:
• Reversing the wire voltage polarity can cause damage to
the unit!
• Always connect a ground (earth) wire to the TB plug’s
Chassis (frame) Ground terminal. Connecting the unit
without a protective ground, or interruption of the
grounding (for example, by using an extension power cord
without a grounding conductor) can cause harm to the unit
or to the equipment connected to it!
TB Connector
Plug
0
Chassis (frame)
Ground
+
Positive pole
-48
or
(-24
)
24/48VDC Negative pole
Figure 4. Power Supply Wire Mapping
to TB Plug
24 Raoul Wallenberg Street, Tel Aviv 69719, Israel
Tel: +972-3-6458181, Fax +972-3-6483331, +972-3-6498250
E-mail: erika_y@rad.com, Web site: http://www.rad.com
Customer Response Form
RAD Data Communications would like your help in improving its product documentation.
Please complete and return this form by mail or by fax or send us an e-mail with your
comments.
Thank you for your assistance!
Manual Name:
Egate-100 Ver. 3.0B
Publication Number:
405-200-03/08
Please grade the manual according to the following factors:
Excellent
Installation instructions
Operating instructions
Manual organization
Illustrations
The manual as a whole
What did you like about the manual?
Good
Fair
Poor
Very Poor
Error Report
Type of error(s) or
problem(s):
Incompatibility with product
Difficulty in understanding text
Regulatory information (Safety, Compliance, Warnings, etc.)
Difficulty in finding needed information
Missing information
Illogical flow of information
Style (spelling, grammar, references, etc.)
Appearance
Other
Please list the exact page numbers with the error(s), detail the errors you found (information missing,
unclear or inadequately explained, etc.) and attach the page to your fax, if necessary.
Please add any comments or suggestions you may have.
You are:
Distributor
End user
VAR
Other
Who is your distributor?
Your name and company:
Job title:
Address:
Direct telephone number and extension:
Fax number:
E-mail:
Publication No. 405-200-03/08
International Headquarters
24 Raoul Wallenberg Street
Tel Aviv 69719, Israel
Tel. 972-3-6458181
Fax 972-3-6498250, 6474436
E-mail market@rad.com
North America Headquarters
900 Corporate Drive
Mahwah, NJ 07430, USA
Tel. 201-5291100
Toll free 1-800-4447234
Fax 201-5295777
E-mail market@radusa.com
www.rad.com
The Access Company
Download PDF